Você está na página 1de 136

DCR-HC40/HC40E RMT-831

SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2


US Model
Ver 1.0 2004. 01 Canadian Model
Brazilian Model
Revision History Korea Model
Japanese Model
DCR-HC40
How to use AEP Model
Acrobat Reader UK Model
East European Model
North European Model
Australian Model
Chinese Model
DCR-HC40E
E Model
Photo : DCR-HC40E Hong Kong Model
Z MECHANISM (MDX-Z200)
Tourist Model
DCR-HC40/HC40E

Link

SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS REPAIR PARTS LIST

DISASSEMBLY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

• For ADJUSTMENTS (SECTION 6), refer to SERVICE MANUAL, ADJ (987670351.pdf).


• For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987670341.pdf). (EXCEPT J MODEL)
• For MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS, refer to the “DV MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Z MECHANISM ” (EXCEPT J: 9-876-210-11) (J: 9-876-210-01).
• Reference No. search on printed wiring boards is available.

On the VC-352 board


This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair
inside the VC-352 board.
Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board, waveforms, mounted parts location and electrical parts list of the VC-352
board are not shown.
The following pages are not shown.
Schematic diagram ............................. Pages 4-19 to 4-60 Mounted parts location ............................. Pages 4-83 to 4-84
Printed wiring board ............................ Pages 4-75 to 4-78 Electrical parts list ................................... Pages 5-17 to 5-25

DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA RECORDER


DCR-HC40/HC40E
ENGLISH JAPANESE

SPECIFICATIONS

Video camera recorder Minimum illumination Dimensions (approx.)


7 1x (lux) (F 1.8) 50 × 92 × 112 mm (2 × 3 5/8 × 4 1/2 in.)
0 lx (lux) (during NightShot plus function)* (w/h/d)
* Objects unable to be seen due to the dark can be Mass (approx.)
System shot with infrared lighting. 400 g (14 oz) main unit only
Video recording system
Input/Output connectors 460 g (1 lb) including the NP-FP50
2 rotary heads, Helical scanning system
rechargeable battery pack and DVM60
Still image recording system Audio/Video input/output
cassette.
Exif Ver. 2.2 *1 10-pin connector
Supplied accessories
*1 “Exif” is a file format for still images, Input/output auto switch
See page 5-12.
established by the JEITA (Japan Electronics Video signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms),
and Information Technology Industries unbalanced AC Adaptor AC-L25A/L25B
Association). Files in this format can have Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω(ohms),
additional information such as your Power requirements
unbalanced
camcorder’s setting information at the time of AC 100 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz
DCR-HC40:
recording. Current consumption
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, 75Ω (ohms),
Audio recording system 0.35 - 0.18 A
unbalanced
Rotary heads, PCM system Power consumption
DCR-HC40E:
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz, stereo 1, 18 W
Chrominance signal: 0.3 Vp-p, 75 Ω(ohms),
stereo 2), 16 bits (Fs 48 kHz, stereo) Output voltage
unbalanced
Video signal DC 8.4 V, 1.5 A
Audio signal: 327 mV (at output impedance
DCR-HC40: Operating temperature
more than 47 kΩ (kilohms)), Input impedance
NTSC color, EIA standards 0° C to 40° C (32° F to 104° F)
more than 47 kΩ (kilohms), Output impedance
DCR-HC40E: Storage temperature
with less than 2.2 kΩ (kilohms)
PAL color, CCIR standards -20° C to + 60° C (-4° F to + 140° F)
DV input/output Dimensions (approx.)
Usable cassette
4-pin connector 56 × 31 × 100 mm (2 1/4 × 1 1/4 × 4 in.)
Mini DV cassette with the mark
LANC jack (w/h/d) excluding the projecting parts
printed
Stereo mini-minijack (Ø 2.5 mm) Mass (approx.)
Tape speed
USB jack 190 g (6.7 oz) excluding the mains lead
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s
mini-B
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s
MIC jack Rechargeable battery pack (NP-FP50)
Recording/playback time (using a DVM60
Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance with DC Maximum output voltage
cassette)
2.5 to 3.0 V, output impedance 6.8 kΩ DC 8.4 V
SP: 60 min
(kilohms) (Ø 3.5 mm), Stereo type Output voltage
LP: 90 min
Fast forward/rewind time (using a DVM60 DC 7.2 V
LCD screen Capacity
cassette)
Picture 4.9 Wh (680 mAh)
Approx. 2 min 40 sec.
6.2 cm (2.5 type) Dimensions (approx.)
Viewfinder
Total dot number 31.8 × 18.5 × 45.0 mm
Electric viewfinder (color)
123 200 (560 × 220) (1 5/16 × 3/4 × 1 13/16 in.) (w/h/d)
Image device
3.6 mm (1/5 type) CCD (Charge Coupled Mass (approx.)
General
Device) 40 g (1.5 oz)
Power requirements
Gross: Approx. 1 070 000 pixels Operating temperature
DC 7.2 V (battery pack)
Effective (still): Approx. 1 000 000 pixels 0° C to 40° C (32° F to 104° F)
DC 8.4 V (AC Adaptor)
Effective (movie): Approx. 690 000 pixels Type
Average power consumption (when using the
Lithium ion
Lens battery pack)
Carl Zeiss Vario-Tessar DCR-HC40:
Combined power zoom lens During camera recording using the viewfinder Design and specifications are subject to change
Filter diameter: 25 mm (1 in.) 2.9 W without notice.
10 × (Optical), 120 × (Digital) During camera recording using the LCD
F = 1.8 ~ 2.3 3.2 W
Focal length DCR-HC40E:
3.2 - 32 mm (5/32 - 1 5/16 in.) During camera recording using the viewfind
When converted to a 35 mm still camera 2.8 W
In CAMERA-TAPE: During camera recording using the LCD
46 - 460 mm (1 13/16 - 18 1/8 in.) 3.1 W
In CAMERA-MEMORY: Operating temperature
38 - 380 mm (1 1/2 - 15 in.) 0° C to 40° C (32° F to 104° F)
Color temperature Storage temperature
[AUTO], [ONE PUSH], [INDOOR] (3 200 -20° C to + 60° C (-4° F to + 140° F)
K), [OUTDOOR] (5 800 K)

—2—
DCR-HC40/HC40E
ENGLISH JAPANESE

—3—
DCR-HC40/HC40E
ENGLISH JAPANESE

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following


safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered Unleaded solder
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-
and bridges. free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point : LEAD FREE MARK
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs • Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and ordinary solder.
recommend their replacement. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing about 350°C.
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
during repairing. heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the • Strong viscosity
circuit board (within 3 times). Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such
or unsoldering. as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT


À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

CAUTION :
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

—4—
DCR-HC40/HC40E
ENGLISH JAPANESE

—5—
DCR-HC40/HC40E

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SERVICE NOTE 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
1-1. SERVICE NOTE ····························································· 1-1 • CD-490 (CCD IMAGER)
1. NOTE FOR REPAIR ······················································· 1-1 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-65
2. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS ·························· 1-2 • IR-051 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER,
3. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT MIC IN)
(FORCE EJECT) ····························································· 1-2 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-65
• JK-260 (JACK)
2. DISASSEMBLY PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-67
2-1. DISASSEMBLY ······························································ 2-1 • LB-095 (EVF RELAY)
2-2. SERVICE POSITION ····················································· 2-3 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-69
2-3. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ··································· 2-6 • SE-141 (PITCH/YAW SENSOR AMP)
2-4. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ································ 2-7 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-69
HELP (List of caution points is shown here.) • PD-213 (LCD RGB DRIVE, BACKLIGHT)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-71
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS • MS-200 (MS CONNECTOR, INDICATOR)
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) ··························· 3-1 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-73
3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/4) ··························· 3-3
3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/4) ··························· 3-5 Printed wiring board of the VC-352 board is not shown.
3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4) ··························· 3-7 Pages from 4-75 to 4-78 are not shown.
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ································ 3-9
3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ······························ 3-11 • FP-228/467/826 FLEXIBLE BOARD
(S/T REEL SENSOR, TAPE SENSOR) ······· 4-79
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND 4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-81
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Mounted parts location of the VC-352 board is not shown.
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2) ······················· 4-1
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) ······················· 4-3 Pages from 4-83 to 4-84 are not shown.
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
• CD-490 (CCD IMAGER) 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-7 5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 5-3
• PD-213 (LCD RGB DRIVE, BACKLIGHT) 5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 5-3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-9 5-1-2. CABINET (R) SECTION ··············································· 5-4
• CONTROL KEY BLOCK (SB6300) 5-1-3. LCD SECTION ······························································· 5-5
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-9 5-1-4. BAT. EVF SECTION ······················································ 5-6
• LB-095 (EVF RELAY) 5-1-5. LENS SECTION ····························································· 5-7
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11 5-1-6. CABINET (L) SECTION ················································ 5-8
• SE-141 (PITCH/YAW SENSOR AMP) 5-1-7. OVERALL (MECHANISM DECK-Z200) ····················· 5-9
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-12 5-1-8. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ····························· 5-10
• JK-260 (JACK) 5-1-9. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ······· 5-11
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13 5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ········································ 5-14
• FP-830 FLEXIBLE (BAT/DC IN)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-14 Electrical parts list of the VC-352 board is not shown.
• IR-051 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER, Pages from 5-17 to 5-25 are not shown.
MIC IN)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15
• MS-200 (MS CONNECTOR, INDICATOR)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15
• CONTROL KEY BLOCK (SS6300, CF6300)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17
• FP-836 (PANEL REVERSE)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-18

Shematic diagram of the VC-352 board is not shown.


Pages from 4-19 to 4-60 are not shown.

• FP-467/228/826 FLEXIBLE (S/T REEL SENSOR,


TAPE SENSOR)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-61

—6—
DCR-HC40/HC40E
SECTION 1 ENGLISH JAPANESE
SERVICE NOTE

1-1. SERVICE NOTE

1. NOTE FOR REPAIR


Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of When remove a connector, don't pull at wire of connector.
bent at the terminal. Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.
Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.

When installing a connector, don't press down at wire of connector.


Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.

Cut and remove the part of gilt


which comes off at the point.
(Take care that there are
some pieces of gilt left inside)

1-1
DCR-HC40/HC40E
ENGLISH JAPANESE

2. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS

In this unit, about 10 seconds after power is supplied to the battery terminal using the regulated power supply (8.4V), the power is shut off so
that the unit cannot operate.
This following two methods are available to prevent this. Take note of which to use during repairs.

Method 1.
Use the AC power adaptor.

Method 2.
Connect the servicing remote commander RM-95 (J-6082-053-B) to the LANC jack, and set the commander switch to the “ADJ” side.

3. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)


1 Remove the cabinet (R) section.
2 Remove the front panel block assembly.
3 Remove the BAT, EVF block assembly.
4 Remove the lens block assembly.
5 Remove the mechanism deck and the VC-352 board.
6 Open the VC-352 board.
7 Disconnect CN9102 (27P, 0.3mm) of VC-352 board.
8 Supply +4.5V from the DC power supply to the loading motor and unload with pressing the cassette compartment.

Loading motor
Disconnect the flexible board from
CN9102 of VC-352 board.

DC power supply (+4.5Vdc)


CN9102
VC
-35
2

VC-352 board

1-2
DCR-HC40/HC40E
SECTION 1 ENGLISH JAPANESE
SERVICE NOTE

1-3
DCR-HC40/HC40E
ENGLISH JAPANESE

CN9102
VC
-35
2

1-4E
DCR-HC40/HC40E

2. DISASSEMBLY

Link

DISASSEMBLY CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

SERVICE POSITION FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

HELP
DCR-HC40/HC40E
2. DISASSEMBLY

The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.


2-1. DISASSEMBLY
1 Shoe (G) cover

5
3
3 5 4
9
2 2
-35 -35
VC VC
4 76
2
1 Two tapping screws (M1.7x6) black
1 2
8 2 Hinge blind
3 LCD section
2
1 4 Cabinet (R) section
2 4
1
1 1 Three screws (M1.7x3) silver 7 FP-836 flexible board (6P)
1
1 Two screws (M1.7x3) silver 2 FFC-036 flexible flat cable (16P) 8 FP-835 flexible board (22P) 3
2
2 Five tapping screws (M1.7x4) black 3 Claw 9 Cabinet (R) section qa
HELP 01
3 Screw (M1.7x3) silver 4 F panel block assembly
3 5 Cushion (F3) 5
4 Open the G cabinet (64) assembly. 7
5 Two claws 6 CF6300 control key block (8P) 0
1

1 Tapping screw (M1.7x5) black 1


2 EYE cup assembly 8
2 1 2
HELP 02 qs 5 3 2
8
1 Two screws (M1.7x3) silver (disassembly of the EVF section)
4
2 Two tapping screws (M1.7x5) black 4
3 P cabinet (C) assembly 2 1 Screw (M1.7 × 2.5) black
2 2 Four claws
35
V C- 3
1 3 Hinge cover (M),
6 FP-836 flexible board
3 7 6 4 Hinge cover (C)
4 1 Two screws (M1.7x3) silver 7 SB6300 control key block (6P) 5 FP-835 flexible board, Hinge section
1 Screw (M1.7x4) black 5
2 Two tapping screws (M1.7x5) black 8 Tapping screw (M1.7x5) black
2 Screw (M1.7x2.5) black 6 FP-831 flexible board (20P) 3 P cabinet (C) assembly 9 Two claws
1 Screw (M1.7x3) silver
3 Screw (M1.7x4) black 7 FP-834 flexible board (10P) 4 Tape (A) 0 Panel cushion
2 BAT section
4 Two tapes (A) 8 BAT, EVF block assembly 5 FP-835 flexible board (22P) qa P cabinet (M) assembly
3 EVF section
5 FP-830 flexible board (26P) 6 Hinge section qs PD-213 board, LCD unit (ACX528AKP-J),
Light guide plate block
1
2

6 3

7
5
5
1
7 5 7
6
3 6 qs
4
6 52 qa
2 -3
3 2 -35 VC
VC 8
HELP 03
4 2
-35
4 5 09 8 VC
1 3
1 Open the G cabinet (64) assembly. 1 FP-833 flexible board (39P)
2 2
2 Screw (M1.7x2.5) black 2 Drum sheet 1 Two tapes (W) 1
2 From lens flexible board (29P) 1 Two tapes (W) qd
3 Eject knob 3 FP-832 flexible board (20P)
3 FP-833 flexible board (6P) 2 Screw (M1.7x2.5) black
4 Six tapping screws (M1.7x4) silver 4 SS6300 control key block (18P)
4 FP-828 flexible board (33P) 3 From lens flexible board (29P)
5 Two screws (M1.7x2.5) black 5 Screw (M1.7x2.5) black
5 Two screws (M1.7x2.5) black 4 SS6300 control key block (18P)
6 FP-832 flexible board 6 Two screws (M1.7x2.5) black
6 Lens block assembly 5 Drum sheet
7 G cabinet (64) assembly, MS board, 7 Open the G cabinet (64) assembly.
6 to qs (CN1205 (20P), CN1208 (39P), CN5001 (33P), CN9102 (27P),
FP-832 flexible board 8 VC-352 board, Mechanism deck, MD frame assembly
CN9103 (27P), CN9101 (10P), CN6501 (10P)) of VC-352 board
FFC-036 flexible board
qd VC-352 board

2-1 2-2
DCR-HC40/HC40E
2. DISASSEMBLY

2-2. SERVICE POSITION

1
[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE VTR SECTION]
Connection to Check the VTR Section
To check the VTR section, set the VTR to the "Forced VTR power ON" mode.
Operate the VTR functions using the touch panel. (When the control key block (SS6300) is removed, the function
buttons of the adjustment remote commander are not effective even if the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote
commander is set to the OFF position.)
6
Setting the "Forced VTR Power ON" mode Exiting the "Forced VTR Power ON" mode
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
7 2) Select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 00. 2) Select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 00.
3) Select page: A, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the 3) Select page: A, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the
5
1 PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

3 2
5
3 Mechanism deck

2 4
-35
VC
4

1
2
VC-352 board Adjustment remote
3 commander (RM-95)
LANC
CN9103
4
2
CN1206 JK
-26
FP-835 Flexible 0
1 CN9102
board (22P)
JK-260 board
7 5 CN9101 CN1208

V
CN6501

C
FP-833 Flexible

-3
5
board (39P)

2
6
2 CN1207
-35
VC 8
SS6300 Control key block (18P)
3 5 9
CN2101 CN1201
2
-35
VC
76

1 2
8
3 6

2 Cabinet (R) section BAT section


-35 To eject a cassette, connect the
4 VC control key block (SS6300)

4
5
1
2 8 CPC-15
1
1 (J-6082-564-A)
8
1 2

2
2
-35 3 FP-830 Flexible
VC board (26P)

7 6 DC-IN I/F unit for LANC control


3
4 (J-6082-521-A)
5

AC power
AC IN
adaptor

2-3 2-4
DCR-HC40/HC40E
2. DISASSEMBLY

[PD-213 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

Adjustment remote
LANC commander (RM-95)

PD-213 board
13
-2
D
P

AC power
adaptor AC IN

2-5
DCR-HC40/HC40E
2. DISASSEMBLY

2-3. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION


LB-095
SE-141
CD-490
JK-260

MS-200
VC-352

IR-051

PD-213

NAME FUNCTION
CD-490 CCD IMAGER
IR-051 REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER, MIC IN
JK-260 JACK
LB-095 EVF RELAY
MS-200 MS CONNECTOR, INDICATOR
PD-213 LCD RGB DRIVE, BACKLIGHT
SE-141 PITCH/YAW SENSOR AMP
TIMING GENERATOR, S/H, AGC, A/D CONV., LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS,
MPEG MOVIE/DIGITAL STILL PROCESS, 64Mbit SDRAM, BUFFER, HI/DIGITAL STILL
VC-352 CONTROL, 32Mbit FLASH, 16Mbit SDRAM, DV SIGNAL PROCESS, DV INTERFACE,
REC/PB AMP, VIDEO I/O, DRUM/CAPSTAN/LOADING DRIVE,CAMERA/MECHA CONTROL,
HI CONTROL, EVF VIDEO, AUDIO I/O, MIC AMP, DC IN, CHARGE, DC/DC CONVERTER,
CONNECTOR

2-6
DCR-HC40/HC40E
2. DISASSEMBLY

2-4. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION


The flexible boards contained in the lens block is not shown.

FP-831
FP-834

FP-828

CONTROL KEY BLOCK


(CF6300)

FP-836

CONTROL KEY BLOCK


(SB6300)
FFC-036

CONTROL KEY BLOCK


(SS6300)

FP-832

FP-830

FP-835

FP-833

2-7E
DCR-HC40/HC40E

HELP
Sheet attachment positions and procedures of processing the flexible boards/harnesses are shown.

HELP 01
(disassembly of the Hinge section)

1 Peel off the adhesive surface.

Adhesive surface

3 Hinge (63) assembly


2 Unwind the FP-835 flexible
board wide open.

4 FP-835 flexible board

HELP
DCR-HC40/HC40E

HELP 02
(disassembly of the EVF section)

2 Three screws 3 Slide the VF cabinet upper assembly,


(M1.7 × 3) etc, direction of the arrow.
silver
FP-831 flexible board

VF flexible fixed sheet

FP-831 flexible board

1 VF flexible fixed sheet

Remove the VF cabinet upper assembly


in the direction of the arrow.
4 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 5), block

Illuminator, Prism sheet


and other parts

HELP 03

Eject knob

CS frame assembly

Screw (M1.7 × 2.5)


silver

HELP
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

Link

OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)

OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/4) POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/4)

OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4)


DCR-HC40/HC40E
SECTION 3 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

CD-490 BOARD FP-828 VC-352 BOARD(1/4) JK-260


LENS ASSY (FLEXIBLE) BOARD(2/4)
IRIS (3/21) (4/21)
(SHUTTER) SPCK CN703
122 TPA CN1208 CN704
(1/21) IC5201 115
VCK
241 IC6201 LCK0 VCK
(8/21)
LCK0
(9/21) NTPA
TPB
8 19

7 20
IC201 IC202 5
CCD OUT
+,- 15 15 30 IC5003
CAMERA
PROCESS
20

268
143

119
IC6401 149
79
IC6301
9
|
NTPB
6 22 DV
12 11 • • • • 47
CCD S/H 4 16 14 31 56 216 DV 45 6 5 23
208 269 162 186
IMAGER 48 AD0-AD13 AD0-AD13 SIGNAL DV
CN201 CN5001 AGC | | | RYO0-RYO3,DEHD,DEVD.DEFLD.SGOUT LBUS0-LBUS3 |
A/D CONV. 1 IFI Y0-Y7 270 120 PROCESS 150 INTERFACE
71 199 42
13 14 1 223 RF
4-1•14•16 •18 12 271 163 187
IC1701 Y OUT
34
279 70
SIGNAL
PROCESS 104
TRCK0
47
FP-833
V1-V4 XSHD,XSHP,CLPDM
CN201
RG,H1,H2
20 16 44 45
9 224 280
RCO0-RCO3,EDHD,EDVD.EDFLD.FRMREF
121 29 37 (FLEXIBLE)(2/4)
CN201 | IFI C0-C3 | 281 71
7-4 24 21 22 19 18 13
6 227 REC DT REC DT
CH SO,SCK MPEG 282 122 45
26-29 5 7 8 11 12 18
MOVIE REC CK REC CK
CN5001 264 13 41
CN5001 CLPOB PROCESS
77 IFI HD 265 72 RF IN RF IN
38 33 64 11 228 139
IFI VD RYI0-RYI3,DE0-DE3
9 IC7101 Y OUT IFI OE 266 14
92 12 229 54 107
HD,VD,FLD HD,VD,FLD 267 73
10 91 13 230
152 189
X5001 47 (1/21) 272 123
12 90 55 153 MC BUS MC BUS
66MHz : HC40
273 166
54MHz : HC40E
IC5001 53
CHCK CHCK
137
EN1 DV
SIGNAL 275
RCI0-RCI3,DE4-DE7
124
190 109
TO
DIR1A 248
155 192
TIMING 59
ADCK27 DIR1B
250
PROCESS 276
HY1 PLL 27IN HY1 PLL 27IN
125
60
SWP
FRRV
SWP
FRRV
2 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
67 GENERATOR 22 284 12 (3/4)
251 TRRT TRRT
FRRV ADATAIN0 58 TRRV TRRV
73 23 168 TRRT ADATAIN1 168 (PAGE 3-5)
ZOOM RST TRRV 112
32 5 20 238
86 127
EXT STROBO ADATAOUT0
17 2 CAM SO,SI,SCK 102 111
169 167 SPCK
ADATAOUT1
A0-A13 D0-D15 SPCK 114
25 1 139 126
161 144 195 174 EVF R SFD BCK 157 VSP SO,SI,SCK VSP SO,SI,SCK
47 EVF G 21
EVF B DSCK VM 3
46 15
IRIS DRIVE 185
52 VD SO,SCK
23 +,- A0-A13 |
M H1
J1 95
EVF HD

A0-A10, A12
22 170 EVF VD
96 EVF R
IRIS HALL IRIS PANEL R EVF G
H 21
25
+,- C5
B6
DRIVE J11
K11 D0-D15
215
|
40
39
PANEL G
PANEL B
EVF B

H12 198 45 VD SO,SCK EVF HD


PANEL HD EVF VD
92 PANEL VD
ND HALL (2/21) TO

H
17 +,- C10 ND
20 26 2 13
93 PANEL R 3 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM

DO-D15
PANEL G
ND FILTER
15 B11 FILTER
DRIVE IC5101 29 35 42 53
PANEL B (2/4)
METER
ND DRIVE
(PAGE 3-3)
12
M 13
+,- K2
L2 IC6202 PANEL HD
PANEL VD

2 FMR A,B B1
64Mbit (5/21)
MR 1
C4
FOCUS
SDRAM
252
MOTOR |
AD4-AD13
DRIVE VIDEO
10
FOCUS
MOTOR
M 11
FOCUS +,- F3
E3 K12 SPCK
IC7101 C OUT IC7101 C OUT
261 A/D
CONV.
(IC6201) 33
K6 ADCK27
6 ZOOM A,XA,B,XB 245
M 9
L4
F1 ZOOM MOTOR
G3 DRIVE 158
CAM SO,SI,SCK 9 10
156
EN1 IC6201 Y OUT
K9 DIR1A 28 53 IC6201 C OUT 46 (11/21)
USB D+,D- DO-D15
L9 DIR1B USB 60 7
ZOOM
M9
29
24
I/F IC7101 18
Y
MOTOR J9
C
IC7101 C OUT VIDEO 14
ZOOM ZOOM RST ZOOM RST 34
(7/21) IN/OUT V
RESET 26 22
AGC
SENSOR Y
ACC

XNS SW
X8401
48MHz
IC8403 4
USB CLK
ADATAIN0
39

48
C
18 301 ADATAIN1
V
XTAL IC7101 Y OUT 42
NIGHT SHOT CN5101 302
OSC 36
ADATAOUT0
298 ADATAOUT1
187 (13/21)
299
(6/21) AUDIO SFD BCK
54 IC8801 185 SIGNAL 82
FP-833
USB D+,D-
IC8401 PROCESS
89
DATA FROM SFD
186
USB CLK 87
DATA TO SFD (FLEXIBLE)(3/4)
177 DIGITAL
CAMERA CONTROL MS BS 151
77 MS DIO DIGITAL STILL
1 STILL DSCK VM PROCESS
X8801
20MHz 78 CAM SO,SI,SCK
MS SCLK 85
CONTROL 122 119 152 VSP SO,SI,SCK
JK-260
SE-141 3
75
MS BS,DIO,SCLK 81 150
78 BOARD(3/4)
BOARD 73 CH SO,SCK
291
A1-A22
304
D0-D15
A1-A19 D0-D15
S.Y I/O 10
19 7
71 16 35 S.C I/O
SE402 1 12 116 98 121 137 5

YAW SENSOR 12 IC401 18 3 37


YAW AD
130 135
18 9

SE401 VIDEO I/O 9


YAW/PITCH 38 35 11 16
SENSOR PITCH AD L CN701
PITCH SENSOR 8 2 5 35 129 A1-A22 AUDIO L I/O 1
AMP 2 16 11
DATA FROM SFD (16/21) R AUDIO R I/O 6
AV IN/OUT
CN401 CN1208 26 4 14 13
DATA TO SFD
D0-D15
SFD BCK
27
D/A CONV. IC7601 L
CN1208 CN704

34 A/D CONV. 57
R
FP-833 TO
AUDIO
I/O
62
SP+ SP+
EXT STROBO SP-
(FLEXIBLE)(1/4) 1 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM ZOOM VR AD
17 SP-

20 26 2 13 25 16, 13 29 36 16
(4/4)
TO
(PAGE 3-8) 29 35 42 53 10 1 48 38 45 4 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
CN704 CN1208
MIC L MIC L (2/4)
CN702
25 3 IC8502 IC8503 71 MIC R MIC R

USB D+,D- USB D+,D- 77 (PAGE 3-3)


32Mbit
26 2 16Mbit (7/21) FLASH MEMORY (7/21)
SDRAM
(USB)

JK-260
BOARD(1/4)

MS-200
BOARD(1/3) CN1205

CN503 6 12
MEMORY MS BS,DIO,SCLK 5 11 MS BS,DIO,SCLK
STICK
Duo 3 8
CONNECTOR CN501

FP-832 AUDIO SIGNAL


VIDEO SIGNAL
(FLEXIBLE)(1/3) VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL

16

3-1 3-2
DCR-HC40/HC40E
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/4) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

VC-352 BOARD(2/4) FP-835 (FLEXIBLE) PD-213 BOARD(1/2)


(1/2)

CN1206 CN601
LCD901(1/2)
1 1 34 20 4
PANEL R,G B
2 2 33 IC602 21
VR,VG,VB
5 2.5 INCH
3 3 32 RGB 22 3 COLOR
DRIVE LCD UNIT
COM COM
26 24

CS
23
22
45 17
19
42 TIMING 14
44 GENERATOR 5
HD
12 12 48 2
VD
TO 13 13 1 CN605
5 OVER ALL 18 31
22 22
BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/4) VD,SO,SI,SCK 19 19
BL ON EXTDA BACK LIGHT
(PAGE 3-5) 21 21 CN606
BACK LIGHT BL H
PANEL R IC601 DRIVE 1

PANEL G Q604-607 BL -15.5V BL L


3
PANEL B

PANEL HD
PANEL VD
LCD902 AUDIO SIGNAL
EVF R
FP-831 (FLEXIBLE) LB-095 BOARD VIDEO SIGNAL
(15/21) CN9301 COLOR
EVF G 34 20 15 6 17 EVF
EVF B EVF R,G,B R,G,B
33 IC9301 21 14 7 18 UNIT
3 TO 32 22 13 8 16
OVER ALL RGB
COM 21
BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) DRIVE 26 17 4
19
(PAGE 3-2) 24 16 5
PSIG
20
12 9 EN, VST, REF, PCG, VCK, XSTBY,BLK,HCK1/2, HST 15
28
45 17 3 18 5
10
16 CN302
42 TIMING
GENERATOR 14
EVF HD 44
EVF VD EVF HD 12
48 10
EVF VD
1 6
18 31 D303
(15/21) BL ON EXTDA 20 1 BACK
LIGHT
CN301
IC9302 BACKLIGHT
DRIVE
Q9303
SP+
SP- 18 12 SP+, SP- 1 SP901
4 TO
19 13 2 SPEAKER
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) CN1205 FP-832 (FLEXIBLE) CN501 CN502

IR-051 BOARD (1/2) FFC-036 (FLAT CABLE) (PAGE 3-2)


MIC L (2/3) MS-200 BOARD (2/3)
(1/2) MIC R

CN601 CN602 CN1204 (17/21)


MIC901 MIC 1 3 14 35
L IC7701 MIC L
22
MIC 3 1 16 MIC AMP MIC R
1 14
R
CN1203 INTELLIGENT
J601 R 36 SHOE MIC L SHOE MIC L
MIC
12 5
L
3
48
3 2 ACCESSORY
(PLUG IN POWER)
14 3 33 FP-834 (FLEXIBLE) SHOE (1/2)
(1/2)
16

3-3 3-4
DCR-HC40/HC40E
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/4) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.
CN1207 CPC
FOR ADJUSTMENTS Z MECHA DECK
2 1 (MDX-Z200)
SWP RF MON
VC-352 BOARD(3/4) (10/21)
REC CK REC CK
CN6501
REC DT REC DT
44

46
IC6501 5
10 ODD
REC/PB 9 6
AMP DRUM
RF IN RF IN 4 EVEN 3
35
3 2
RF MON
30

SWP RF SWP
39
TO
2 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM SWP
38
(1/4)

(PAGE 3-2)

MC BUS 172

164 (12/21)
35

38
SPCK VSP SO, SCK
36
IC9101
(13/21) (1/2) M903
CN9103
SWP, FRRV, TRRT, TRRV
IC8801 190
CAP FG
4 CAPSTAN
FG AMP
7 8
FG 1,2 22 CAPSTAN
FG
25
165 CAP ON,CAP FWD
MECHA
52 CONTROL 166 80 20
| |
45 1 17
74
33 CAPSTAN CAP U,V,W 4

32
MOTOR
DRIVE
76 | M CAPSTAN
MOTOR

FRRV
(12/21) Q2305 78 1
23 75
TRRT
89
CAP PWM
41 43
CAP ERROR (19/21) SWITCHING
CAP VS
11
TRRV 178
IC9101 24 75 77 |
179
LPF (2/2)
IC2301 14

69 CN9101 M901
VSP SO,SI,SCK VSP SO,SI,SCK 70 PWM Q2306 63 6 DRUM
DRIVE 64 DRUM U,V,W
67 88
DRUM PWM
44 45
DRUM ERROR
21 77
SWITCHING
DRUM VS
67
65 | M MOTOR

DRUM 68 1
LPF
MOTOR
82 DRIVE
VD SO, SCK 83
80 10 DRUM FG

9 DRUM PG

TO
5 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM DRUM FG DRUM FG AMP
(1/4) VD SO, SI, SCK 197 53 52
(PAGE 3-3)

DRUM PG
198 50 DRUM PG AMP 49
CN9102
(13/21)
1 M902
IC8802 15 LOAD,UNLOAD 32 LOADING MOTOR
DRIVE
69 LM +, – |
M LOADING
MOTOR
EEPROM 13 33 72 4

5 2 6
TREEL FG
192 29 26 27
SREEL FG REEL FG AMP DEW AD DEW
6 86 193 25 22 23 5
SENSOR
CN1207 CPC 7 EEP SO, SI, SCK 87
FOR ADJUSTMENTS
5 84 TAPE END
31 21 TAPE END DETECT 20 T REEL +, – 26 T REEL
H902
1 25 SENSOR

3 TAPE TOP
30 19 TAPE TOP DETECT 18 S REEL +, – 22 S REEL
X8801 H901
20MHz 23 SENSOR
66
DEW AD Q901
65 119
HI SO,SI,SCK TAPE END SENSOR
20
63
TAPE LED ON
TO 180
6 OVERALL
REC PROOF
Q902
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(4/4) CHIME SDA,CHIME SCK,CHIME VDD TAPE TOP SENSOR
11
(PAGE 3-8) XCC DOWN

Q8801 106 D901


MODE SW A - MODE SW C
XLOGO LED TAPE LED
LED DRIVE 98 |
108
18

REC PROOF

12

13 MIC902
4PIN
|
CONNECTOR
15
XCC DOWN
17 S903
C. C. DOWN
7
MODE
|
SWITCH
9
S902
16 DIGITAL VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL

3-5 3-6
DCR-HC40/HC40E
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

VC-352 BOARD(4/4) XCC DOWN


XLOGO LED

CONTROL KEY (6/21)


S001-003 CN1201
BLOCK (SS6300) REC STRAT/STOP SW
PHOTO REC SW
4
. KEY AD0 IC8401
PHOTO FREEZE SW 14
HI CONTROL

RV001 T/W VR 2 273 XSHUTTER OPEN


REC PROOF
REC PROOF 234
S004 139 KEY AD0

OPEN/EJECT SW 18 254 IR ON CHIME SDA 246


.
D004 (CHG) 10 Q8408 CHIME SCK 247 CHIME SDA
. TO
CHIME SCK
D003 (PLAY/EDIT) 9 4 XEJECT SW
LED
DRIVE
287 MS LED ON
CHIME AD0 134
. CHIME VDD 6 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM(3/4)
5 CHIME AD1 135
XCC DOWN .
D002 (CAMERA MEMORY) 8 9. XCHARGE LED CHIME AD2 136 (PAGE 3-5)
4 12 XVTR LED
D001 (CAMERA TAPE) 7 . SI 23 93 TXD
. .
11
. XMEM LED
17 2 10 SO 24 TXC, RXD, SCK 94 RXD
XCAM LED .
POWER SW . (14/21) SCK 25
.
16 1 XPOWER SW 95 SCK
. HI SO 97
XMODE SW ..
2
IC8201 X 0A
X 1A
52

51
X8202
32.768KHz
HI SI 98
.
.
HI SO,SI,SCK
XHI SCK 99
MS-200 BOARD (3/3) FP-832 HI CONTROL
X TAL 29 X8201
131 CAM DD ON

(FLEXIBLE) X TAL 28
10MHz
Q8403 137 TP X
(3/3) CN1205
.
(7/21)
3 TOUCH 4 138 TP Y EEP TXD 103 5
MS LED ON PANEL . . .
D501 (ACCESS) 8 14 EEP RXD 104 2
249 TP SEL1
BT501
LI 3V
10 16
I/F
.
250 TP SEL2
.
EEP SCK 105
.
6 IC8402
LITHIUM S501 EEPROM
11 17 73 XRESET
BATTERY 140 KEY AD1
RESET 3 .
(SECONDARY) CN501
142 KEY AD3
.
143 KEY AD4

IR-051 BOARD (2/2) FFC-036


(FLAT CABLE) ZOOM VR AD TO
D602
(TALLY)
(2/2)
EXT STROBO 1 OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM(1/4)
15 2 16 F TALLY LED
D601 (PAGE 3-1)
(NIGHT SHOT LED) Q1201, 1202
IR ON
5 12 LED DRIVE 45 SIRCS PWM
IC601 S004, S002, S001
4 9 8 41 SIRCS SIG
REMOTE EASY SW
COMMANDER S601 KEY AD3
3 BACK LIGHT SW
RECEIVER
LENS COVER XSHUTTER OPEN Q8201 PANEL OPEN/CLOSE SW
7 10
OPEN/CLOSE
BATT SIG 42 IB SO XLOGO LED
CN602 CN1204 I/F . 8 D001 (ILLMINATION)
43 IB SI
S003
35 VTR DD ON XBATT INFO SW 6 2 DSPL/BATT INFO SW
57 SHOE ON Q8202

77 BATT/XEXT EASY MODE LED 17


LED
6 D002 (EASY) CONTROL KEY
DRIVE
37 FAST CHARGE CN1202 BLOCK(CF6300)

LANC OUT
FP-835 PD-213
LANC SIG 56 40 LANC OUT (FLEXIBLE) (2/2)
57 LANC I/O .
54
LANC IN .
39 LANC IN
BOARD(2/2) TP L
TPX Q601, Q602 TP R
XRESET TPY TP TOP 2. LCD901(2/2)
RESET 51 18 18 TOUCH
LI 3V 14 . TP SEL1 3 . 4 TP BOT 5. TOUCH
45 . 16 16 PANEL
VOUT . . PANEL
53 VCC 17 17 I/F 4.
48 .
62 1
49 3V REG 47 EVER 3.0V CN603

14 20 HI EVER SO
CONTROL KEY
. .
15
HI EVER SO,SCK
21 HI EVER SCK SHOE ID2 55
.
BLOCK(SB6300)
(19/21) SHOE ID1 54 S001, S002
A 1.2V
KEY AD1 3.
VTR DD ON

SHOE ON
44 IC2301 D 1.2V
6 6
4
REC START/STOP SW
LCD BACKLIGHT SW
DC/DC CN1206 CN601
USB 3.1V CN602
BATT/XEXT CONVERTER
RESET MT 5V
FAST CHARGE LANC I/O

FP-830 BATT SIG


A 1.5V
D 1.5V
FP-836 BOARD
(FLEXIBLE) CN2101 NS 2.8V
2 S101
RP 2.8V 1. KEY AD4
7 PANEL REVERSE SW
A 2.8V 2
BT901
CN1212
BATTERY
TERMINAL C 1 D 2.8V

AU 2.8V
9
EP 2.8V FP-833 (FLEXIBLE) JK-260 BOARD
14 (4/4)
D 1.9V
CAM 3.1V
(4/4) J701
Q2101, LANC SIG
Q2102 24 2 LANC
A 4.6V
CN1208 CN704
AU 4.6V

EP 4.6V
RP 4.6V

EP 8.5V

13.5V FP-834 (FLEXIBLE)


(2/2)
BL -15.5V
EXT STROBO
5 4
CAM 15V
CAM -7.5V 7
. SHOE ID1,2 6
.
INTELLIGENT
CAM DD ON 6 5 ACCESSORY
BATT UNREG LANC SIG
SHOE
22 8 7
26
VTR UNREG
SHOE UNREG
9
. SHOE UNREG
8
(2/2)
J901 10
16
DC IN CN1203
20

15 Q2105,Q2106
SHOE UNREG

16

3-7 3-8
DCR-HC40/HC40E
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

FP-830
(FLEXIBLE)
VC-352 BOARD (1/2)
BT901
BATTERY CN2101
TERMINAL
2 F004
BATT UNREG BATT UNREG
7

C 1
BATT SIG Q2101,
2102 Q2103,
9 2104

CHARGE
14 SWITCH F001
MT/15.5/BL REG UNREG

F002
J901 C/D UNREG
DC IN 22 ACV UNREG LF2101 F003
VTR UNREG
26
Q2105,2106 (19/21)

INIT CHARGE ON
16 F005

IC2301
FAST CHARGE

20
BATT/XEXT NS 2.8V
15
DC/DC CONVERTER
RESET,LANC I/O D2305 LANC DC
SHOE ON RECT

VCC01 63

VCC02 69 Q2301
SWITCHING L2306 L2310
CN1203 D 1.5V

INTELLIGENT 9 SHOE UNREG L2309 A 1.5V


ACCESSORY 8 61 VCC1
D2301 Q2313,Q2314 L2325 A 1.2V
SHOE FP-834 10
1.2V REG
A 1.2V
OUT1-1 64 L2326 D 1.2V
D 1.2V
(FLEXIBLE) 49 3V REG Q2308
OUT1-2 66 VTR UNREG

47 IN1 12 AU 4.6V
Q2303
SWITCHING L2307
46 MT 5V AU 2.8V
CN1205
LI 3V D2302 L2312
BT501 10 16 45 NS 2.8V RP 4.6V
LITHIUM
BATTERY L2314 PR 2.8V RP 2.8V
BATTERY
(SECONDARY) IN
14 OUT2 68 A 2.8V A 2.8V
65 BATT SENS VOUT DETECT L2315
(14/21) VCC 53 48
A 1.5V
MS-200 FP-832 66 ACV SENS 62
IN2 11
L2316 D 2.8V
IC8201 Q2302
D 1.5V

BOARD (FLEXIBLE) HI CONTROL


XRESET 73 51 RESET
SWITCHING
L2308 L2317 AU 2.8V USB 3.1V
(1/2)
BATT IN 31 50 L2318
EP 2.8V 1
(1/2) 57 SHOE ON TO
HI EVER SO 20 14 DIN D 1.9V POWER
77 BATT/XEXT
BLOCK
HI EVER SCK 21 15 CLK DIAGRAM
38 INIT CHARGE ON OUT3-1 70 Q2320,Q2321
XCS DD 67 13 LD Q2309 D 1.9V D 2.8V (2/2)
37 FAST CHARGE 1.9V REG
S501 OUT3-2 72
XRESET
Q8201
(19/21) MT 5V (PAGE 3-11)
RESET 11 17 35 1
42 IB SO VTR DD ON 44 CTL1 IN3 10
CN501 I/F 5 4
USB 3.1V A 4.6V
BATT SIG 43 IB SI
VR 41 IC2302 CAP VS
3.1V REG
L2305 L2319 CAP ERROR
Q2304 A 4.6V
1 XPOWER SW XLANC PWR ON 7 DRUM VS
SWITCHING L2320
2 XMODE SW AU 4.6V
DRUM ERROR
LANC I/O L2321
EP 4.6V CAM DD ON
55 OUT4 73
L2322 RP 4.6V CAM 15V
VCC3 5.6V
60
REG IN4 9 CAM -7.5V
LANC DC VOUT4
58 EP 13.5V
POWER OFF 5V
VB 62
Q2303 L2302
ON CN1201 Q2305 CAP VS
XPOWER SW SWITCHING (19/21)
CONTROL MODE
XMODE SW
17
5
1

4
CAM 3.1V CAM 3.1V

KEY 16
OUT5 75
IC2303
BLOCK D004 CHG LED
R1207
EVER_3.0V
CAP ERROR
3.1V REG
11 +INE5 24
(SS6300) 43 VREF
Q2306
L2303
DRUM VS
R1206 38 RT
D 2.8V SWITCHING
D001-003 MODE LED 6
Q2313
RV001 T/W VR 3 OUT6 77 13.5V
13.5V
REG
DRUM ERROR
+INE6 21
Q2301
L2301 L2304

LCD902
LB-095 BOARD 15V
REG
CAM 15V

OUT7 79 Q2311
COLOR CN302 CN301 CN9301 L9303 Q2307
EVF EP 8.5V EP 8.5V
SWITCHING 8.5V
UNIT 2 20 1 IN7 6 REG
EP 2.8V

D303 VCONT6 3
BACK L9302 EP 4.6V VOUT6 4
LIGHT 2 19
LED REG6CTL 5 CAM -7.5V
-7.5V
REG
VCONT5 1 D2304
(15/21) (15/21) VOUT5 2 RECT
Q2315, EP 4.6V
2316 8
IC9302 IC9301 CAM DD ON
9
EP 8.5V 2
EP 2.8V TO
BACK LIGHT RGB 7 POWER
DRIVE DRIVE NS 2.8V BLOCK
FP-831 TIMING LANC DC 11 DIAGRAM
GENERATOR BL-15.5V -15.5V (2/2)
(FLEXIBLE) 10
(PAGE 3-12)
CN1206
18

BL ON

16

3-9 3-10
DCR-HC40/HC40E
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.
FFC-036 IR-051 BOARD FP-835 LCD901

(FLAT CABLE) PD-213 BOARD 2.5 INCH


CN602 D602
EP 4.6V
(FLEXIBLE) L602 COLOR

CONTROL KEY 1
NS 2.8V
16 TALLY LED
8
Q608, 609 CN605
LCD
UNIT

VC-352 BOARD(2/2) BLOCK


R1219,
R1220
NS LED A
D601 IC601 EP 8.5V
9
L603
18
11 6 NIGHT SHOT LED
EP 2.8V
(CF6300) 7
A 4.6V
10 REMOTE
COMMANDER
7

CN1204 RECEIVER TO
MT 5V R1224
5
D002 2 POWER
BLOCK DIAGRAM
EASY LED
(1/2)
R1223 D001
(PAGE 3-10) IC601 IC602
7 ILLMINATION LED
FP-833 BACK
EXTDA
RGB
CN1202 LIGHT DRIVE
(FLEXIBLE)
IC401 SE-141 DRIVE
3 31
TIMING
GENERATOR
10

SE401, 402

PITCH/YAW
PITCH, YAW
BOARD 1 18
ND901
NS 2.8V SENSOR BL 2.8V
SENSOR
AMP 6 BACK
LIGHT
CN401
A 2.8V
39 1 BL H
11 BACK LIGHT DRIVE 1
L401 NS 2.8V
Q604-607
J701 L-15.5V BL L
LANC DC
21 LANC DC
5
CN704 JK-260 BOARD LANC
10
CN601
3
CN606
CN1208

A 1.2V
CN501 D501
D2.8V
D 1.2V 15 9 ACCESS LED

(16/21) (17/21) (20/21)


Q7605 (13/21)
VTR UNREG VTR UNREG SP VCC CN503
REG
IC7601 IC7701 (13/21) IC8801 IC1201 4 6
MS VCC
2
9 MEMORY
XREEL MT 5V STICK
AUDIO MIC HALL ON 5
3.1V FP-832 MS-200 Duo
AU 4.6V AU 4.6V
I/O AMP IC8802 CAMERA 153
REG
CN1205

(FLEXIBLE)
CONNECTOR
D/A CONV.
CONTROL
MECHA ZM RST LED BOARD(2/2)
A/D CONV. EEPROM CONTROL 55
1 (2/2)
MS VCC ON
AU 2.8V AU 2.8V

D 2.8V (7/21)
(6/21) (7/21) (7/21)
D 1.9V
IC8502
CAM DO ON CAM DD ON
131
IC8401 IC8402 IC8403 16M
MS VCC ON HI FLASH
286 EEPROM XTAL
CONTROL MEMORY
OSC
DIGITAL
CHIME PWR CONT STILL
(10/21) (8/21) (4/21) (5/21) (3/21) 130 CONTROL

(7/21)
IC6501 IC6401 IC6201 IC6202 IC5201
TO
RP 4.6V RP 4.6V
REC/PB DV SIGNAL DV SIGNAL PROCESS 64Mbit CAMERA IC8503
AMP PROCESS MPEG MOVE PROCESS SDRAM PROCESS
1 POWER BLOCK
DIAGRAM
RF SIGNAL DIGITAL STILL PROCESS FB8402
FB8501
32M
(1/2) PROCESS AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESS
SDRAM
(PAGE 3-10)
(12/21)

RP 2.8V RP 2.8V
EP 13.5V
IC9101
CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE
A 2.8V A 2.8V CAP VS 75
CAPSTAN FG AMP
77 DRUM Q8404-8406
A 1.5V A 1.5V MOTOR DRIVE CHIME VDD
DRUM ERROR 45 DRUM FG,PG AMP 13 4PIN MIC902
FB6201 CONNECTOR
CAP ERROR LOADING
D 1.5V D 1.5V 43 MOTOR DRIVE
DRUM VS REEL FG AMP
USB 3.1V TAPE TOP,END DET Q9101
USB 3.1V USB 3.1V 64
DRUM,CAP ERROR AMP SENSOR VCC
67 27 T REEL, H901,
A 1.2V A1.2V S REEL
SENSOR H902
D 1.2V D1.2V D1.2V

CHIME PWR CONT

XREEL HALL ON
D 1.9V
D2.8V
D 2.8V D 2.8V D 2.8V

VTR UNREG VTR UNREG

MT 5V R9120 TAPE LED A


MT 5V MT 5V
19 TAPE LED D901
A 4.6V CN9102

CAP VS (1/21) Z MECHA DECK


A 2.8V A 2.8V
(MDX-Z200)
CAP ERROR
D 2.8V IC5001
DRUM VS A 4.6V A 4.6V
60 FP-828(FLEXIBLE)
TIMING
DRUM ERROR D 1.9V 3.4V GENERATOR
5 4
CAM DO ON
(1/21) CD-490 BOARD
CAM 15V IC5002 CAM 15V
CN201
CAM -7.5V 5 21
EP 13.5V (9/21) (11/21) (2/21) (2/21)
3.4V REG
22
10
IC201 IC202
CAM 3.1V
IC6301 IC7101 IC5102 IC5101 (1/21)
CAM -7.5V
23 9
CCD
IMAGER
S/H

CAM 3.1V
DV
INTERFACE
VIDEO
IN/OUT
2.8V REG FOCUS/ZOOM/
IRIS/ND IC5003 A 2.8V
19 12
AGC DRIVE
ACC AGC
A/D CONV. CN5001

4
CN5101
ZM VCC ZOOM
29 RESET
SENSOR
ZM RST LED
Q5101 LENS ASSY
2.8V MR A2.8V FOCUS
3 MR
SENSOR

16

3-11 3-12E
DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

A CN5101 29P CN1207 8P


29 ZM_VCC RF_MON 1
28 MAKER_SELECT SWP 2
27 ZM_GND GND 3
26 ZM_OUT XCS_EEP 4
CPC
25 I_HALL- EEP_SCK 5
(FOR CHECK)
24 I_BIAS- EEP_SO 6

B 23

22
I_DRIVE+
I_DRIVE-
EEP_SI

GND
7
8
21 I_HALL+
20 I_BIAS+
CN1202 8P
19 IR_SW_GND
XLOGO_LED 8
18 IR_SW_OUT
17 ND_HALL+
LOGO_LED 7
CONTROL KEY
16 ND_BIAS+
XEASY_LED 6
BLOCK(CF6300)
LENS UNIT EASY_LED_VDD 5
C 15
14
ND_HALL-

ND_BIAS-
REG_GND 4
KEY_AD3 3
13 N_DRIVE-
BATT_INFO 2
12 N_DRIVE+
REG_GND 1
11 FOCUS-
10 FOCUS+
9 ZOOM_B CN1201 18P

8 ZOOM_XB XEJECT_SW 18

D 7
6
ZOOM_XA
ZOOM_A
XPOWER_SW
XMODE_SW
17
16

5 LENS_TEMP_OUT N.C. 15

4 MR/TEMP_GND KEY_AD0(SS) 14

3 F_MR_VCC N.C. 13 CONTROL KEY


2 F_MR_A N.C. 12 BLOCK(SS6300)
1 F_MR_B CHARGE_LED_VDD 11

XCHARGE_LED 10

E CN5001 33P
XVTR_LED
XMEM_LED
9
8
33 VSUB
XCAM_LED 7
32 RCSUB
MODE_LED_VDD 6
31 GND
REG_GND 5
CN201 26P 30 GND
KEY_AD0(PHOTO) 4
VSUB 1 29 V4
D_2.8V 3
RCSUB 2 28 V3
ZOOM_VR 2
GND 3 27 V2
F V4 4 26 V1
N.C. 1

V3 5 25 GND
CCD IMAGER V2
V1
6
7
24 GND
VC-352 BOARD(1/2) CN1203 10P
23 CAM_-7.5V SHOE_UNREG 10
GND 8 22 CAM_15V SHOE_UNREG 9
CAM_-7.5V 9 21 CAM_15V LANC_SIG 8
CAM_15V 10 20 GND HOTSHOE_ID1 7 INTELLIGNET
GND 11 19 A_2.8V HOTSHOE_ID2 6 FP-834 ACCESSORY SHOE
G FLEXIBLE
FP-828 FLEXIBLE

A_2.8V 12 18 CLPDM EXT_STROBO 5


CLPDM 13 17 GND SHOE_MIC_GND 4
GND 14 16 GND SHOE_MIC_L 3
CCD_OUT+ 15 15 CCD_OUT+ SHOE_UNREG_GND 2

CCD_OUT- 16 14 CCD_OUT- SHOE_UNREG_GND 1


GND 17 13 GND
XSHP 18 12 XSHP

XSHD 19 11 XSHD
H GND 20 10 GND

H2 21 9 GND
H1 22 8 H2
LH 23 7 H1
RG 24 6 LH
GND 25 5 RG
GND 26 4 GND
CD-490 BOARD 3 GND
I 2 GND
1 GND

MIC 901
MIC UNIT
CN601 4P CN602 16P CN1204 16P
1 INT_MIC_L NS_2.8V 16 1 NS_2.8V

SW_COM/SW_GND
L-CH

MIC/REC_SW_GND
2 GND XF_TALLY_LED 15 2 XF_TALLY_LED

XCCDOWN_SW
TOP/END_GND

XMODE_SW_C

XMODE_SW_B

XMODE_SW_A
27P

10P

10P
27P

XREC_PROOF

LM_UNLOAD

LM_UNLOAD
TAPE_LED_A
TAPE_LED_K
3 INT_MIC_R EXT_MIC_L 14 3 EXT_MIC_L

CHIME_VDD
CHIME_SDA

FG/PG_COM
CHIME_SCK
J
HALL_GND

R-CH
HALL_VCC

TAPE_END

TAPE_TOP

LM_LOAD

LM_LOAD

DRUM_W

DRUM_W
DRUM_U
DRUM_U
DRUM_V
DRUM_V
4 GND EXT_MIC_GND 13 4 EXT_MIC_GND
HE_GND
FG_GND
FG_GND

HE_VCC
FG_VCC

FG_VCC

M_COM
SREEL+
TREEL+
CN9103

CAP_W

CAP_W
CAP_W
CAP_W

SREEL-
TREEL-

CN9101
CAP_U
CAP_U
CAP_U

CAP_U

CN6501
CAP_V
CAP_V

CAP_V
CAP_V

YEVEN
XEVEN
CN9102
WHE+

DEW+

XODD
YODD
WHE-

DEW-
UHE+

YSDL
XSDL
VHE+

UHE-
VHE-

EXT_MIC_R 12 5 EXT_MIC_R

GND

GND

GND

GND
N.C.
FG2

FG1

PG
FG
REG_GND 11 6 REG_GND
FLAT CABLE

27
26

25

24

23

22

21

20
19

18

17

16

15
14

13
12

11
10

27

26
25
24

23

22
21
20

19
18
17

16

15
14
13

12

11
10

10

10
9
8

7
6
5

4
3

2
1

8
7
6

4
3
2

1
2
3

4
5
6

8
9

9
8

6
5
4

3
2
1
A_4.6V 10 7 A_4.6V
FFC-036

SIRCS_SIG 9 8 SIRCS_SIG
REG_GND 8 9 REG_GND

XSHUTTER_OPEN 7 10 XSHUTTER_OPEN
J601
NS_LED_A 6 11 NS_LED_A
K MIC
(PLUG IN POWER) NS_LED_K 5 12 NS_LED_K TO CAPSTAN MOTOR TO SENSOR,LOADING MOTOR,MODE SW TO DRUM MOTOR TO VIDEO HEAD
INT_MIC_GND 4 13 EXT_MIC_GND

INT_MIC_L 3 14 INT_MIC_L

INT_MIC_GND 2 15 EXT_MIC_GND
INT_MIC_R 1 16 INT_MIC_R
MECHANISM DECK(Z200)
IR-051 BOARD
L
16

4-1 4-2 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SE-141 BOARD
A 22P CN1206 CN601 22P
REG_GND 6 39 A_2.8V PANEL_R 1 1 PANEL_R TEST2 1
PITCH_AD 5 38 VST_C_RESET PANEL_G 2 2 PANEL_G RGT 2
REG_GND 4 37 YAW_AD PANEL_B 3 3 PANEL_B B 3
YAW_AD 3 36 REG_GND REG_GND 4 4 REG_GND R 4

VST_C_RESET 2 35 PITCH_AD REG_GND 5 5 REG_GND G 5


A_2.8V 1 34 REG_GND KEY_AD1 6 6 KEY_AD1 PSIG 6
CN401 6P 33 EXT_MIC_R EP_2.8V 7 7 EP_2.8V HCK1 7

B 32
31
MIC_GND
EXT_MIC_L
EP_4.6V
EP_8.5V
8
9
8
9
EP_4.6V
EP_8.5V
HCK2
WIDE
8
9 LCD901

FP-835 FLEXIBLE
(USB) 2.5INCH
30 INT_MIC_R BL_-15.5V 10 10 BL_-15.5V TEST1 10
COLOR LCD
29 MIC_GND NS_2.8V 11 11 NS_2.8V REF 11 UNIT
USB GND 5
CN704 27P 28 INT_MIC_L PANEL_HD 12 12 PANEL_HD HST 12
ID 4
REG_GND 1 27 MIC_GND PANEL_VD 13 13 PANEL_VD PCG 13
D+ 3
LANC_SIG 2 26 REG_GND BL_GND 14 14 BL_GND XSTBY 14
D- 2
XLANC_JACK_IN 3 25 REG_GND REG_GND 15 15 SE_GND(REG_GND) VSSG 15
VCC 1
TOUCH
C CN702
REG_GND
XLANC_LANC_DC
4
5
24
23
LANC_SIG
XLANC_JACK_IN
TP_Y
TP_SEL1
16
17
16
17
TP_Y
TP_SEL1
N.C.
VSS
16
17
PANEL

REG_GND 6 22 REG_GND TP_X 18 18 TP_X VDD 18 ND901


BACKLIGHT
TPA 4 S_Y_IO 7 21 LANC_DC VD_SI 19 19 VD_SI DWN 19

NTPA 3 REG_GND 8 20 REG_GND XCS_LCD 20 20 XCS_LCD EN 20


DV
TPB 2 S_C_IO 9 19 S_Y_I/O VD_SCK 21 21 VD_SCK VCK 21

FP-833 FLEXIBLE
NTPB 1 REG_GND 10 18 S_C_I/O VD_SO 22 22 VD_SO VST 22
4P CN703 AUDIO_L_I/O 11 17 REG_GND COS 23

D REG_GND 12 16 AUDIO_L_I/O COM 24

S-Y 10
AUDIO_R_I/O

REG_GND
13
14
15
14
REG_GND
AUDIO_R_I/O
CN1212
PANEL_RVS_SW
6P
1
PD-213 BOARD CN605 24P

VIDEO IN/OUT 9 CN603 6P

BOARD
FP-836
MULTI_JACK_IN 15 13 REG_GND PANEL_RVS_SW 2
VIDEO/AUDIO GND 8 PANEL TP_BOT 1
1

VIDEO_I/O 16 12 MULTI_JACK_IN N.C. 3 REVERS


JACK AD 7 TP_L 2
REG_GND 17 11 VIDEO_I/O N.C. 4
AUDIO R 6 S101 N.C. 3
A/V IN OUT REG_GND 18 10 REG_GND REG_GND 5
S-C 5 TP_TOP 4
TPA 19 9 REG_GND REG_GND 6
N.C.(ANC_DC) 4 TP_R 5
10

E S GND 3
NTPA

REG_GND
20
21
8
7
TPA
NTPA
N.C. 6
N.C.(LANC_SIG) 2
TPB 22 6 TPB
AUDIO L 1
NTPB 23 5 NTPB
CN701 6 REG_GND BL_H 1
REG_GND 24 4 REG_GND
5 N.C. N.C. 2
D+ 25 3 D+
CONTROL 4 BL_ON/OFF_SW BL_L 3
D- 26 2 D- KEY BLOCK
(SB6300) 3 2ND_S/S_SW BL_FB 4
LANC USB_DET 27 1 USB_DET
2 N.C. N.C. 5
CN1208 39P
F J701
JK-260 BOARD 1 REG_GND BL_2.8V 6
CN602 6P CN606 6P

VC-352 BOARD(2/2)
20P CN9301 21P CN302
26 ACV_UNREG LED_K 20 20 EVF_VDD N.C. 1
25 ACV_UNREG EP_4.6V 19 19 EVF_GND VDD 2

G 24
23
ACV_UNREG
ACV_UNREG
EVF_GND
COM
18
17
18
17
HST
HCK1
VSS
VSSG
3
4
22 ACV_UNREG PSIG 16 16 HCK2 HST 5
BT901
(BATTERY TERMINAL) 21 N.C. VR 15 15 BLK HCK2 6
20 ACV_GND VG 14 14 STB HCK1 7

FP-831 FLEXIBLE
19 ACV_GND VB 13 13 VCK RGT 8
18 ACV_GND EN 12 12 PCG BLK 9 LCD902
FP-830 FLEXIBLE

17 ACV_GND VST 11 11 REF REF 10


COLOR EVF
UNIT
H 16

15
ACV_GND

BATT/XEXT
REF

PCG
10

9
10

9
VST
EN
STB

VST
11

12
14 BATT_GND VCK 8 8 VB VCK 13
13 BATT_GND STB 7 7 VG EN 14
12 BATT_GND BLK 6 6 VR PCG 15
11 BATT_GND HCK2 5 5 PSIG VB 16
10 BATT_GND HCK1 4 4 COM VR 17
9 BATT_GND HST 3 3 EVF_GND VG 18

I 8
7
N.C.
BATT_UNREG
EVF_GND
EVF_VDD
2
1
2
1
EP_4.6V
LED_K
CS

PSIG
19
20
J901 6 BATT_UNREG 20P CN301 COM 21

DC IN 5 BATT_UNREG

4 BATT_UNREG
REG_GND
SP-
20
LB-095 BOARD
19
3 BATT_UNREG
SP+ 18
2 BATT_UNREG
XRESET 17
1 BATT_SIG

J CN2101 26P
LI_3V

D_2.8V
16
MS-200 BOARD
15
XACCESS_LED 14 14 REG_GND 10 GND
REG_GND 13 13 MS_VCC 9 VCC
MS_BS 12 12 MS_SCLK 8 SCLK
MS_DIO 11 11 MS_INSERT 7 N.C.

FP-832 FLEXIBLE
MS_INSERT 10 10 MS_DIO 6 INS Memory Stick
Duo
N.C. 9 9 MS_BS 5 N.C. CONNECTOR
MS_SCLK 8 8 REG_GND 4 DIO
K N.C. 7 7 XACCESS_LED
BT501
LITHIUM BATTERY
3 N.C.
MS_VCC 6 6 D_2.8V (SECONDARY) 2 BS
REG_GND 5 5 LI_3V 1 GND
KEY_AD2 4 4 XRESET CN503

D_2.8V 3 3 SP+ CN502 2P


ZOOM_VR 2 2 SP- 1 SP+
SP901
REG_GND 1 1 REG_GND 2 SP- (SPEAKER)

20P CN1205 CN501 14P

16

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2) 4-3 4-4


DCR-HC40/HC40E

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

Link

CD-490 BOARD (CCD IMAGER) IR-051 BOARD


(REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER, MIC IN)
MS-200 BOARD
PD-213 BOARD (LCD RGB DRIVE, BACKLIGHT) (MS CONNECTOR, INDICATOR)

CONTROL KEY BLOCK (SB6300) CONTROL KEY BLOCK (SS6300)

LB-095 BOARD (EVF RELAY) CONTROL KEY BLOCK (CF6300)

SE-141 BOARD (PITCH/YAW SENSOR AMP) FP-836 BOARD (PANEL REVERSE)

JK-260 BOARD (JACK) FP-228/FP-467/FP-826 FLEXIBLE BOARD

FP-830 FLEXIBLE BOARD (BAT/DC IN)

COMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ENGLISH JAPANESE

(ENGLISH)
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For schematic diagrams) 1. Connection
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ Pattern box
Link
µF. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics
and tantalums.
• Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted.
kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ.
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip. 1.0 m
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum
capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C541 L452
22U 10UH
TA A 2520
Front of the lens
Kinds of capacitor
Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)

• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX


indicate that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated.
• Parts with * differ according to the model/destination. 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of
Refer to the mount table for each function. Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic
H
curve B, unless otherwise noted.
Yellow

Magenta
White
• Signal name Cyan
XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC Green

Red
Blue
• 2: non flammable resistor
• 5: fusible resistor
• C: panel designation
• A: B+ Line
• B: B– Line
• J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. A B A=B B A
• C: adjustment for repair. Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
• A: VIDEO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: VIDEO/AUDIO/SERVO SIGNAL
• A: SERVO SIGNAL
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
(Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)
• Voltages and waveforms are measured between the
measurement points and ground when camera shoots
color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)
and reference waveforms.
(VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used) When indicating parts by reference number, please
• Voltage values change depending upon input include the board name.
impedance of VOM used.)
Note : Note :
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
• The CD-490 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
with a CCD imager. Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
the old one and mount it onto the new one.
• If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the
adjustments for the camera section.
• As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity
from its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.
In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with
dusts nor exposed to strong light.

4-5
DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ENGLISH JAPANESE

(JAPANESE)

1.0 m

CD-490

CD-490

4-6
DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CD-490 PRINTED WIRING BOARD

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS For Schematic Diagram


• Refer to page 4-65 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 IC201 qg, qh, qk Note:Pin No.and index mark of IC201 and IC202
are shown as viewed from the bottom.

CD-490 BOARD IC201 IC201


IC201 is not included
in this COMPLETE board.
CCD IMAGER 4.2 Vp-p ICX457AKF-13 1 IC201 1, 4
A 4 IC201 qf
C202
0.1u
B
37 nsec Note CCD IMAGER
XX MARK:NO MOUNT R11.1/P0 R-7.4/P0

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1
VSUB V4
R201 JL201 R-0.3/P0 8.2 Vp-p

2
0 R1.4 N.C. V3
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE P0 JL202 R-0.4/P0.1

3
H2 V2
R :REC MODE 4.8 Vp-p C201 JL203 R-7.3/P0 53.6 µsec

P :PB MODE

4
37 µsec XX R1.7 N.C. V1
P0 JL204 R-7.8/P0

5
R1.4 H1 VL
P0 JL205
3 IC201 qs 2 IC201 2, 3

6
R13.4 LH GND
P0 JL206 R11.2/P0

7
RG RCSUB
B C203 C205 C204

8
0.1u GND N.C. 1u 4.7u 8.2 Vp-p
B R12.3/P0 B 25V

9
V_OUT VDD2 R15.3 TA B 53.6 µsec
2.0 Vp-p C206 P0

10
CN201 26P XX N.C. VDD
53.6 µsec R205 1k
GND 26 R8.2
P0 R206 R204
GND 25 R203 C207 10k
12k 0.1u
R12.3 R7.4 2700 B
RG 24 P0 P0
LH 23 Q202
0 L202
2SC5096-O/R(TE85L) 100uH
H1 22 CLAMP
C H2 21
Q201
DTC144EMT2L

GND 20
IC202
SWITCH
AD80017AJRURL Note
IC202
XSHD 19 CDS
R0.9/P0 R2.8/P0

10 11 12 13 14

1
XSHP 18 SHP CLPDM
R0.4/P0

2
GND 17 SHD GND
TO 2.8

3
VC-352 BOARD(1/21) CCD_OUT- 16 GND VDD
CN5001 C208 1.3 R0.6/P1.8
0.1u

4
CCD_OUT+ 15 CCD_IN CCD-
B R0.6/P1.8
THROUGH THE

5
FP-828 GND 14 BYP CCD+
D FLEXIBLE C209 R2.0/P0.4

6
CLPDM 13 0.1u BYP GND
L201 R2.0/P0.1 1.6
B

7
A_2.8V 12 BYP BYP
(PAGE 4-19 C214 C213
C210 C215
10u 1u
OF LEVEL3) GND 11 6.3V B 0.1u 0.1u
A TA B B
CAM_15V 10
FB201 0uH
CAM_-7.5V 9 C218
C219 10u
GND 8 0.1u B 10V
A TA
V1 7
V2 6
V3 5

E V4 4
7 IC202 qd, qf 6 IC202 5
GND 3
RCSUB 2
VSUB 1 3.7 Vp-p
0.6 Vp-p
37 nsec 53.6 µsec

16
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL

CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
REC

PB

4-7 4-8 CD-490


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS PD-213 PRINTED WIRING BOARD
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-71 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
D604
PD-213 BOARD XX
Q609
LCD RGB DRIVE,BACKLIGHT 2SA2029T2LQ/R

A XX MARK:NO MOUNT
LCD B+ SWITCHING 8.6

L603 C618 8.7


C619 C620 C621 R624 C625
0uH 2.2u XX XX
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE XX XX 47k
8.0

R625
5 IC602 es 6800
0.1

2.8

540 mVp-p
Q608
B H
C630
XX
R636
1k
DTC144EMT2L
INVERTER
D602
EDZ-TE61-5.6B

C632 C606 C611 C617 C631 C626


C603 C609 10u C624 R637 R634
XX 1u 0.1u 0.1u 1u 1u
XX XX TA A B B 120k B 1M
C604 C605 B 10V B
22u 0.1u
L601 TA AA B 0
4V
0uH Q610 -5.5
2SA2029T2LQ/R
CN601 22P C622 SWITCHING
C616 0.01u 4.7u
PANEL_R 1 B
C615 0.01u
C PANEL_G 2
C614 0.01u
CN605 24P
PANEL_B 3

B
REF
REG_GND 4 24 COM

4.7u
R618 XX
7 IC602 ef R614 R620
REG_GND 5 10k 23 C0S
FB601 ± 0.5%
22k 3 IC602 wa VST
KEY_AD1 6 22 VST

C623
0uH
VCK
EP_2.8V 7 21 VCK
EN

1.2

2.8

1.8

1.7

1.7

0.3

2.8
1.2

1.4
4.1
2.1

2.2
550 mVp-p

TO
EP_4.6V 8
L602 0uH
6 IC602 ed 4 IC602 ws 20 EN
H
2.9 Vp-p DWN
VC-352 BOARD(21/21) EP_8.5V 9 H 19 DWN
CN1206 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
D BL_-15.5V 10 18 VDD

Filter1

VCC1
RIN

GIN

BIN

EXTDA

BLDET
XLED
REF

COMREF

COMOUT

COMDA
THROUGH THE LCD901
FP-835 NS_2.8V 11 17 VSS
2.9 Vp-p 2.5INCH
FLEXIBLE PANEL_XHD 2.9 Vp-p C627
PANEL_HD 12 0.1u 16 N.C. COLOR
R613 B LCD UNIT
(PAGE 4-59 PANEL_VD 13
PANEL_XVD H
91k
H
15 VSSG
OF LEVEL3) CL603
± 0.5% XSTBY
BL_GND 14 2.5 VP 14 XSTBY (With in

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Filter2 VP PCG Touch
SE_GND(REG_GND) 15 1.2 4.6 CL604 13 PCG Panel)
C610 GND1 VCC2 RB601 VB HST
TP_Y 16 0.1u C612 2.5 10 12 HST
R612 OPOUT VB CL605
SIGNAL PATH TP_SEL1 17
B
R609
560p
CH
XX 1.2
OPIN IC602 VG
2.5
8
6
4
7
5
3
VG
REF
11 REF

E VIDEO SIGNAL
TP_X
VD_SI
18
19
VD_SI
68k

R640 470
1.4
FVCC LCD RGB DRIVE VR
2.5 2 1
CL606
VR WIDE
10 TEST1

2.8 VD_SI 9 WIDE

5
XCS_LCD SO GND2 HCK2
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA XCS_LCD 20 XCS_LCD R641 470 2.7
XCS IC602
2.8 8 HCK2
VD_SCK PWM HCK1
VD_SCK 21 2.8 VD_SCK R610 0 2.8 CXM3006R-T4 0 WIDE 7 HCK1
3
4

REC VD_SO XSCK WIDE VP


VD_SO 22 2.8 0 VD_SO R635 470 2.8 0 VST 6 PSIG
SI VST VG
6
1

PB 2.8 0
VDD
2.8 5 G
VDD VR
Q602 2.8 1.4 VCK 4 R
SCAN VCK VB
2

XP4111-TXE
PANEL_XHD 3 B
2.8 SWITCH HD VSS RGT
2 IC602 w;
F PANEL_XVD 2.6 2 RGT

XWRT/CLKIN
Q601 1 TEST2
XP4211-TXE 2.8
5

XSTBY
SWITCH

XCLR

HCK1

HCK2

DWN
VXD

RGT

PCG
VSS

HST
8 IC602 rk

EN
3.1 Vp-p

CONTROL KEY BLOCK 0


4

C602 Q603 H
(SB6300) 6P CN602 6P
2200p 2.8
R611 2SC5658T2LQ/R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 IC602 1
6

B
1

100k RESET 3.1 Vp-p

2.8

2.8

1.4

1.4
0

0.2
2.8
0

2.2
1 REG_GND REG_GND 1 C601
S001 XX
2 N.C. N.C. 2 C607 2.8 H
2

REC START/STOP 0 0.1u D601

G B MA111-(K8).S0

XSTBY
3 2ND_S/S_SW 2ND_S/S_SW 3 R639 3.1 Vp-p

HCK1
HCK2

DWN
R627

RGT

PCG
HST
2700 0 0

EN
S002 4 BL_ON/OFF_SW BL_ON/OFF_SW 4 R607 V
1M C613
LCD 5 N.C. N.C. 5 XX
BACKLIGHT
6 REG_GND REG_GND 6

R603
XX

CN603 6P
CN606 6P
TP_BOT 1 2.8
H TP_L 2
R608 R615 R623
6 BL_2.8V

TOUCH PANEL 2.2 R619 5 N.C. ND901


N.C. 3 47k 4700 33 33
± 0.5% ± 0.5% BACKLIGHT
± 0.5% 4 BL_FB
Included TP_TOP 4 1.7
LCD Panel Q604 3 BL_L
TP_R 5 R606 2SC5658T2LQ/R 2.4 Q607
220k SWITCH 2SB1218A-QRS-TX 2 N.C.
N.C. 6 ± 0.5%
IC601 NJM12904V (TE2) R617 2.4 1 BL_H
1k 1.7
R604 4.6
R638 Vcc
1

LND601 XX -0.1
0 2.2 A_OUT C608 R642 1.7 Q606
B_OUT 0.1u 47k R616 2SB1218A-QRS-TX R633
2

CH_GND
A_IN-
I CONTROL KEY BLOCK (SB6300) is replaced as a block. 2.4
B_IN-
B 2200 0.1 -0.1 0
3

A_IN+
So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted. 2.4
B_IN+
2.8

IC601
4

GND
C633 Q606,607
16 4.7u
R643
47k Q605 CURRENT DETECT
SELECT SWITCH B 2SC5658T2LQ/R
BL ON SW

PD-213/SB6300 4-9 4-10


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LB-095 BOARD SE-141 BOARD
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-69 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LB-095 BOARD SIGNAL PATH


EVF_RELAY VIDEO SIGNAL
A
XX MARK:NO MOUNT D303
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
E1S35-AW0C7-01-A2
(BACK LIGHT) REC
CN301 20P PB
LED_K 1 R302
47k
EP_4.6V 2 R303
33k
EVF_GND 3 R304
68k
B COM

PSIG
4
5
21

20
COM
PSIG
VR 6 19 CS
VG 7 18 VG
VB 8 17 VR
TO
VC-352 BOARD(15/21) EN 9 16 VB
CN9301
THROUGH THE VST 10 15 PCG
FP-831
FLEXIBLE REF 11 14 EN

C (PAGE 4-48 OF LEVEL3)


PCG
VCK
12

13
13
12
VCK LCD902
COLOR EVF
VST UNIT
STB 14 11 STB
BLK 15 10 REF
HCK2 16 9 BLK

HCK1 17 8 RGT
HST 18 7 HCK1

EVF_GND 19 6 HCK2

D EVF_VDD 20 5

4
HST
VSSG
C301 C302
0.1u 1u B R305 3 VSS
B 1M
C303 2 VDD
D302 2.2u F
EDZ-TE61-5.6B 1 N.C.
CN302 21P

E
16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SE-141 BOARD NO MARK:REC/PB MODE


R :REC MODE
PITCH/YAW SENSOR AMP P :PB MODE
A XX MARK:NO MOUNT

FB401 C410 C413 C415


0uH C401 C404
4.7u XX 0.047u 10u XX
B B 6.3V
1 2
R404 R406
Vref OUT 10k XX

SE401 C414
10u
C409 6.3V R405
(PITCH SENSOR) GND Vcc 0.047u 1M
B
B 3 4
1
CN401
A_2.8V
6P

TO
C416 L401 2 VST_C_RESET VC-352 BOARD(21/21)
4.7u 0uH CN1208(34 to 39 pin)
B 3 YAW_AD
0.7
0.9
1.3

1.3

1.3
1.3
1.3

1.2

C402 4 REG_GND THROUGH THE


0.1u FP-833 FLEXIBLE
B 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 PITCH_AD
FB402
(PAGE 4-60 OF LEVEL3)
GND

AM1
HO1

OUT1

0uH
LO1

PASS

6 REG_GND
HI1
LIB1

LIA1

1 2
Vref1

3 4
5
7
6
8 IC401 IC401
C UPC6756GR-8JG-E2
Vref2

FB403 C403
LIB2

LIA2

OUT2

CRST

0.1u
LO2
HI2

HO2

AM2

VCC

0uH PITCH/YAW
RB401 B SENSOR AMP
22k
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

FB404 C406
0.6

0.8
1.3
1.3
1.3

1.3
1.3

1.2

R0/P2.8
2.8

0uH 0.047u
B

1 2
Vref OUT R402
C408 C411 1M
0.047u 10u
SE402 B 6.3V
(YAW SENSOR)
D GND Vcc
C412 R403
10k
3 4 10u
6.3V
C405 C407
4.7u
B XX

16

4-11 4-12 LB-095/SE-141


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS JK-260 PRINTED WIRING BOARD
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-67 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

JK-260 BOARD
JACK
A XX MARK:NO MOUNT
D703 R701
CN704 27P 1SS357(T3SONY1) CN702 5P
10k
USB_DET 27 1 VCC
D- 26 2 D-
2 4
D+ 25 3 D+ (USB)
1 3
REG_GND 24 R702 LF701 4 ID
10k 0uH
NTPB 23 D701 5 USB GND

B REG_GND
TPB 22 XX

21
NTPA 20 CN703 4P
TPA 19 1 NTPB

REG_GND 18 2 TPB
DV
TO REG_GND 17 3 NTPA
VC-352 BOARD(21/21)
CN1208(1 to 33pin) VIDEO_I/O 16 4 TPA

THROUGH THE MULTI_JACK_IN 15


FP-833
C FLEXIBLE REG_GND 14
D702
(PAGE 4-60 OF LEVEL3) AUDIO_R_I/O 13 NSAD500H-T1-A
REG_GND 12
AUDIO_L_I/O 11
CN701 10P
REG_GND 10
1 AUDIO L
S_C_IO 9
2 N.C(LANC_SIG)
REG_GND 8
3 S GND

10
S_Y_IO 7
4 N.C(LANC_DC)
D REG_GND 6
5 S-C A/V
XLANC_LANC_DC 5 IN OUT
6 AUDIO R
REG_GND 4
7 JACK AD

1
XLANC_JACK_IN 3
8 VIDEO/AUDIO GND
LANC_SIG 2
9 VIDEO IN/OUT
REG_GND 1
10 S-Y

SIGNAL PATH
E VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO 3
2 J701
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL 5
1 LANC
4
REC
PB

16

1 2 3 4 5 6

FP-830 FLEXIBLE
A BAT/DC IN FP-830 FLEXIBLE is replaced as a block.
XX MARK:NO MOUNT So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

CN001 26P
LND001
BATT_SIG 1
LND002
BATT_UNREG 2
LND003
BATT_UNREG 3
LND004
BATT_UNREG 4
LND005
B BATT_UNREG 5
LND006
BATT_UNREG 6
LND007
BATT_UNREG 7 BT901
BATT_GND 8
LND008 C BATTERY
LND009 TERMINAL
BATT_GND 9
LND010
D
TO BATT_GND 10
VC-352 BOARD(18/21) LND011
CN2101 BATT_GND 11
LND012
BATT_GND 12
(PAGE 4-53 OF LND013
C LEVEL 3) BATT_GND 13
LND014
BATT_GND 14
LND015
BATT/XEXT 15
LND016
ACV_GND 16
LND017
ACV_GND 17
LND018
ACV_GND 18
LND019
ACV_GND 19
LND020
ACV_GND 20 J901
LND021
ACV_GND 21 DC IN
LND022
ACV_UNREG 22
D ACV_UNREG 23
LND023
LND024
ACV_UNREG 24
LND025
ACV_UNREG 25
LND026
ACV_UNREG 26
16

JK-260/FP-830 4-13 4-14


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS IR-051 BOARD MS-200 BOARD
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-65 for printed wiring board of IR-051 board.
• Refer to page 4-73 for printed wiring board of MS-200 board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IR-051 BOARD
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER,MIC IN
A IC601
XX MARK:NO MOUNT SBX3055-01
CN602 16P
4.6 4.6 R604
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 47 16 NS_2.8V
4 3
15 XF_TALLY_LED
IC601 OUT
GND
VCC
GND C602
14 EXT_MIC_L
1u 13 EXT_MIC_GND
REMOTE COMMANDER 2 1 B
RECEIVER 12 EXT_MIC_R
11 REG_GND TO
B D604
1SS355TE-17 10 A_4.6V
VC-352 BOARD(21/21)
CN1204
9 SIRCS_SIG THROUGH THE
FFC-036
8 REG_GND FLAT CABLE
SIGNAL PATH D601
CL-330IRS-X-TU
7 XSHUTTER_OPEN
(NIGHT SHOT) 6 NS_LED_A (PAGE 4-59
OF LEVEL3)
5 NS_LED_K
AUDIO
SIGNAL 4 INT_MIC_GND
R601
D602 1800 3 INT_MIC_L
C REC TLRMV1021(T15SOY,F)
(TALLY) 2 INT_MIC_GND

PB 1 INT_MIC_R
S601
LENS COVER
CPEN/CLOSE
D603
XX 1 2
MIC901
MIC UNIT 3 4
CN601 4P
INT_MIC_L 1
L-CH MIC
D GND

INT_MIC_R
2

3
R-CH MIC
GND 4

1 FB601 0uH
J601 2
3
MIC
(PLUG IN POWER) 4
FB602
0uH

E C601
2200p VDR601 VDR602
LND601 B
CHASSIS_GND

16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MS-200 BOARD
MS CONNECTOR, INDICATOR
A XX MARK:NO MOUNT
CN501 14P CN503 10P

REG_GND 1 10 GND
MS_VCC 2 9 VCC
MS_SCLK 3 8 SCLK The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark
MS_INSERT 4 7 N.C. 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
TO MS_DIO 5 6 INS
Memory Stick Duo
VC-352 BOARD(20/21) CONNECTOR
CN1205 MS_BS 6 5 N.C. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour
B THROUGH THE REG_GND 7 4 DIO la sécurité.
FP-832 R501 Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
FLEXIBLE XACCESS_LED 8 100 3 N.C.
D_2.8V 9 2 BS
(PAGE 4-58 0 0
D501
OF LEVEL3) LI_3V 10
TLRMV1021(T15SOY,F)
1 GND
XRESET 11 (ACCESS)

SP+ 12 BT501
SP- 13 LITHIUM BATTERY LND501
(SECONDARY)
REG_GND 14 CHASSIS_GND
C S501 VDR502
XX
VDR503 VDR504
XX XX
VDR505
XX SIGNAL PATH
RESET
VIDEO SIGNAL
3 4 AUDIO
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
VDR501 1 2
SURGE REC
CN502 2P

PB
D 1

2
SP+

SP-
SP901
(SPEAKER)

16

4-15 4-16 IR-051/MS-200


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5

CONTROL KEY BLOCK(SS6300) CONTROL KEY BLOCK(CF6300) S001


(PANEL OPEN/CLOSE)
FUNCTION KEY FUNCTION KEY COM
A XX MARK:NO MOUNT A XX MARK:NO MOUNT
RV001
18P 50k 8P DUMMY DUMMY
LND001
N.C. 1 T (ZOOM) W LND001
LND002 REG_GND 1 R001
ZOOM_VR 2 LND002 1500
LND003 BATT_INFO 2 S002
D_2.8V 3 LND003
R001 TO KEY_AD3 3 BACKLIGHT
LND004 10k S002
KEY_AD0(PHOTO) 4 VC-352 BOARD(20/21) LND004
LND005 R002 PHOTO(REC) CN1202 REG_GND 4
REG_GND 5 4.9k LND005 D001
LND006 EASY_LED_VDD 5
MODE_LED_VD0 6 S003 (PAGE 4-58 LND006 R002
S003
B LND007 R003
12.1k
OF LEVEL3) XEASY_LED 6 1200
TO
VC-352 BOARD(20/21)
XCAM_LED
XMEM_LED
7
8
LND008
PHOTO
(FREEZE) B LOGO_LED 7
LND007 DSPL/BATT INFO
LND008
CN1201 LND009
XVTR_LED 9 XLOGO_LED 8
(PAGE 4-57 OF LEVEL3) LND010
XCHARGE_LED 10 S004
LND011
CHARGE_LED_VDD 11 CONTROL KEY BLOCK(CF6300) is replaced LND009 EASY

N.C. 12
LND012 as a block. CHASSIS_GND
LND013
D001
So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD
N.C. 13
LND014 TLGV1021(T15SOY,F) is omitted.
KEY_AD0(SS) 14 (CAMERA_TAPE)
C N.C. 15
LND015
D002
D002

XMODE_SW 16
LND016

LND017
TLGV1021(T15SOY,F)
(CAMERA_MEMORY)
C
XPOWER_SW 17
LND018
XEJECT_SW 18 D003
TLGV1021(T15SOY,F)
(PLAY/EDIT)

CONTROL KEY BLOCK(SS6300)


is replaced as a block. D004
So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD CL-270D_C_TS
D is omitted. (CHG)

S001
REC START/STOP

POWER
XPOWER

XMODE
S004
E OPEN/ EJECT

CHASSIS_GND LND022

CHASSIS_GND LND023

16

1 2 3 4 5 6

FP-836 BOARD
PANEL REVERSE FP-836 BOARD is replaced as a block.
A XX MARK:NO MOUNT So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD
is omitted.
6P
LND006
REG_GND 6
LND005
TO REG_GND 5
VC-352 BOARD(20/21) LND004
CN1212 N.C. 4
LND003 S101
N.C. 3 (PANEL REVERSE)
(PAGE 4-58 LND002
OF LEVEL3) PANEL_SW 2
B PANEL_SW 1
LND001

16

SS6300/CF6300/FP-836 4-17 4-18


Schematic diagram of the VC-352 board are not shown.
Pages from 4-19 to 4-60 are not shown.
DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS FP-467/FP-228/FP-826 FLEXIBLE BOARD
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-79 for flexible wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TO VC-352 BOARD(12/21) (PAGE 4-41 of LEVEL 3)


CN9102

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27
1

9
27P

LM_LOAD

LM_LOAD

LM_UNLOAD

LM_UNLOAD

DEW+

DEW-

XMODE_SW_A

XMODE_SW_B

XMODE_SW_C

MODE_SW_COM/SW_GND

TAPE_TOP

XREC_PROOF

CHIME_VDD

CHIME_SDA

CHIME_SCK
MIC/REC_SW_GND/
XCCDOWN_SW_GND
XCCDOWN_SW

TAPE_LED_K

TAPE_LED_A

TAPE_END

END_GND

SREEL+

SREEL-

HALL_VCC

TREEL-

TREEL+

HALL_GND
B
M903
LOADING
MOTOR
M 8P
LM_LOAD 1

FP-467 LM_UNLOAD 2

FLEXIBLE S902
MODE
MODE_SW_COM 3
Vcc -
SWITCH XMODE_SW_A 4

XMODE_SW_B 5
+ G
XMODE_SW_C 6
C DEW- 7 Q901
H901
S REEL
TAPE END SENSOR
DEW+ 8 SENSOR
DEW

FP-228 SENSOR
Q902
TAPE TOP
Vcc -

FLEXIBLE SENSOR
D901
(TAPE LED) G
+
S903
(CC DOWN) H902
T REEL

D SENSOR

(4 PIN
CONNECTOR)

FP-826 (REC PROOF)

FLEXIBLE MIC902

16

FP-467/FP-228/FP-826 4-61 4-62


DCR-HC40/HC40E

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

Link

CD-490 BOARD SE-141 BOARD

IR-051 BOARD PD-213 BOARD

JK-260 BOARD MS-200 BOARD

LB-095 BOARD FP-228/FP-467/FP-826 BOARD

COMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

NAME FUNCTION
CD-490 CCD IMAGER
IR-051 REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER, MIC IN
JK-260 JACK
LB-095 EVF RELAY
MS-200 MS CONNECTOR, INDICATOR
PD-213 LCD RGB DRIVE, BACKLIGHT
SE-141 PITCH/YAW SENSOR AMP
TIMING GENERATOR, S/H, AGC, A/D CONV., LENS DRIVE, CAMERA PROCESS,
MPEG MOVIE/DIGITAL STILL PROCESS, 64Mbit SDRAM, BUFFER, HI/DIGITAL STILL
VC-352 CONTROL, 32Mbit FLASH, 16Mbit SDRAM, DV SIGNAL PROCESS, DV INTERFACE,
REC/PB AMP, VIDEO I/O, DRUM/CAPSTAN/LOADING DRIVE,CAMERA/MECHA CONTROL,
HI CONTROL, EVF VIDEO, AUDIO I/O, MIC AMP, DC IN, CHARGE, DC/DC CONVERTER,
CONNECTOR
DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

(ENGLISH)
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)

(For printed wiring boards)


• : Uses unleaded solder. • Chip parts
• : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. Transistor Diode
(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) C 6 5 4 4 5 6 5 4 4 5 3 3 3 1 23
• Through hole is omitted.
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 6 54
• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram
1 2 2 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 3 4
isn’t mounted in this model.
• C: panel designation
5 4 3 3 4 5 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
5 4 6 4
(JAPANESE)
1 3 1 3

BOARD INFORMATION
parts location pattern
board name CSP IC
(shown on page) number of layers layers not shown
CD-490 4-81 2 – –
IR-051 4-81 2 – –
JK-260 4-81 2 – –
LB-095 – 2 – –
SE-141 4-81 2 – –
PD-213 4-82 2 – –
MS-200 4-82 2 – –
IC2301, IC5001, IC5101,
IC5201, IC6201, IC6202,
VC-352 4-83 8 2 to 7 IC6301, IC6401, IC7601,
IC8201, IC8401, IC8502,
IC8503, IC8801, IC9101

4-63
DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS


• Refer to page 4-63 for common note for printed wiring board. • : Uses unleaded solder.

CD-490 BOARD(SIDE A) CD-490 BOARD(SIDE B)


Q202

R205
IC201 is not included
in this COMPLETE board. R204 R202

C203
4 3 R206

26
C207 JL206

C213 R203
C206
20 15 11 7 JL205
A C208 A

C209
C210

10 15 20
C214

JL202
JL203
JL204

JL201
14 8

CN201
5

+
L201
IC202
IC201

C215
1 7

FB201

5
2 6 C218
+

1
C219

R201
1 5 10
1 Q201
B C205
C204 B

C202
+

L202
C201

1-861-173- 11 1-861-173- 11

16
1 2 2 1 16

IR-051 BOARD(SIDE A) IR-051 BOARD(SIDE B)


2
1

S601
LENS COVER
4
3

OPEN/CLOSE
A A

IC601 D601
D604

CN601
4 2
4 1
C602

3 1
R604

B B
4 J601 3
MIC
1

(PLUG IN POWER)
CN602

1 2 FB602
VDR601
10

C601 R601
16
D603

FB601 VDR602
C C
LND601 D602
1-861-177- 11 1-861-177- 11

16
1 2 2 1 16

4-65 4-66 CD-490/IR-051


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

• Refer to page 4-63 for common note for printed wiring board. • : Uses unleaded solder.

JK-260 BOARD(SIDE A)

LANC
DV (USB)
AV IN/OUT

2
4
13 11 4 1 3 5

1
3
J701
10 1
B

CN703
5

6
14 12 6 7

CN701 CN702 1-861-178- 11

JK-260 BOARD(SIDE B)
C

LND702

LND701
5 4 R701 R702
D
D702 D701

D703
1 3
CN704 LF701
2 10 20 26

E 1 5 15 27 11
1-861-178-
16
1 2 3 4 5
JK-260 4-67 4-68
DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

• Refer to page 4-63 for common note for printed wiring board. • : Uses unleaded solder.

LB-095 BOARD LB-095 BOARD


(SIDE A) (SIDE B)

D302
CN302
21 15 5 1 R304 R303

C303
C301 R302

R305
C302
20 10 2
K A D303
1 5 10 15 20

CN301 1-861-174- 11 1-861-174- 11

SE-141 BOARD(SIDE A) SE-141 BOARD(SIDE B)

FB404
FB401 C407
3 1 +
R406

2
C408 R403R402 C416
C401
C415

SE401
A A

FB403
(PITCH)

(YAW)
SE402
2

20
4

1
R404

+
R405

IC401
C404

5
C414
C413

11 15

4
FB402

C409 C410
C405

C411
C412

C402 10

C406
C403

CN401
6
RB401
L401
B B

1
11
1-861-175- 11 1-861-175-
16
1 2 2 1 16

4-69 4-70 LB-095/SE-141


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

• Refer to page 4-63 for common note for printed wiring board. • : Uses unleaded solder.

PD-213 BOARD

LND601 C616 C615 C614

R623
R617
R619
R615
R604

R608
R606
Q604

4
IC601
C608
R638 1 5 10 15 22

6
R639
A Q606 Q607 R633

R643

CN606
R603

R642
8
R616

1
Q601
C633

1
Q605
+ B

C618

C619
L603
CN601

3
4

C620
C621

1
6
C602

6
3
4
Q602

CN603
1
6

Q608
C601

L602
C622

B R636
R614

R620
R618
C605

C609

R625

24
C623
C603
L601

7 5 C611 C630
R624
+

C617
R613

20
A

D604
+
C604

C610 Q609
36 30 25
A

37 24 4 C624 CN602
R609

C625

15
C612

6 3 R634

D602
40 CL603
8

CN605
20
R612

RB601

R640
IC602 CL604

R637
R641 Q610

10
2

6 1
C632

R610 45 8 2 CL605 C627


R635 1 C631 C626
+

48 13 CL606 R627
5 12

5
FB601 C606
P

R611
C607

1
C
D601

1
C613
R621
R622

R607 Q603
1-861-179-
21

16
1 2 3 4 5
PD-213 4-71 4-72
DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

• Refer to page 4-63 for common note for printed wiring board. • : Uses unleaded solder.
MS-200 BOARD(SIDE A) MS-200 BOARD(SIDE B)

14 10 5 1
A A
CN501

12
10

)
VDR503 VDR505

STICK Duo
VDR502 VDR504

CONNECTOR
CN503
1

5
BT501

( MEMORY
B LITHIUM BATTERY B

R501
(SECONDARY)

1
S501
RESET 12

VDR501

11
CN502
C D501 C
LND501 1-861-176-
11
1-861-176- 11

16
1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 16

CAUTION :
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

Printed wiring board of the VC-352 board are not shown.


Pages from 4-75 to 4-78 are not shown.

4-73 4-74 MS-200


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

• Refer to page 4-63 for common note for printed wiring board. • : Uses unleaded solder.
Q902
TAPE TOP
SENSOR

FP-826 FLEXIBLE BOARD 27


1
H902 S903
H901 T REEL (CC DOWN)
S REEL SENSOR
SENSOR
1
Q901
TAPE END 8
SENSOR
11
(REC PROOF) 1-861-117-

(4 PIN
CONNECTOR)

D901
(TAPE LED)
MIC902 S902
MODE SWITCH

M902
LOADING
MOTOR
M
FP-228
FLEXIBLE BOARD

DEW
SENSOR
11 1
1-677-049-

FP-467 FLEXIBLE BOARD 1-686-798- 11

FP-228/FP-467/FP-826 4-79 4-80


DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION no mark : side A


* mark : side B
CD-490 BOARD IR-051 BOARD JK-260 BOARD SE-141 BOARD
* C201 B-1 C601 C-1 CN701 B-2 C401 A-2
* C202 B-1 C602 B-1 CN702 B-4 * C402 B-2
* C203 A-1 CN703 B-3 * C403 B-2
* C204 B-1 * CN602 B-2 * CN704 E-4 C404 A-2
* C205 B-2 C405 A-2
* C206 A-2 D601 B-2 * D701 D-4 * C406 B-2
* C207 A-2 D602 C-2 * D702 D-4 * C407 A-2
* C208 A-2 D603 C-2 * D703 D-5 * C408 A-2
* C209 A-1 D604 B-1 C409 B-2
* C210 A-1 J701 B-1 C410 B-2
* C213 A-2 FB601 C-2 C411 A-2
* C214 A-2 FB602 C-2 * LF701 D-4 C412 A-2
* C215 B-1 C413 A-2
* C218 B-1 IC601 B-2 * R701 D-4 C414 A-2
* C219 B-1 * R702 D-5 C415 A-2
J601 B-1 * C416 A-2
* CN201 A-1
R601 C-2 * CN401 B-1
* FB201 B-1 R604 B-1
FB401 A-2
IC201 A-1 S601 A-1 FB402 A-2
* IC202 A-2 * FB403 A-1
VDR601 C-2 * FB404 A-2
* L201 A-2 VDR602 C-2
* L202 B-2 * IC401 A-2

* Q201 B-1 * L401 B-1


* Q202 A-2
* R402 A-2
* R201 B-1 * R403 A-2
* R202 A-1 R404 A-2
* R203 A-2 R405 A-2
* R204 A-2 R406 A-2
* R205 A-2
* R206 A-2 * RB401 B-2

SE401 A-2
* SE402 A-1

4-81 CD-490/IR-051/JK-260/SE-141
DCR-HC40/HC40E
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

no mark : side A
* mark : side B
PD-213 BOARD MS-200 BOARD
C601 B-3 R603 A-1 BT501 B-4
C602 A-3 R604 A-2
C603 B-2 R606 A-3 * CN501 A-5
C604 B-2 R607 C-2 * CN502 C-3
C605 B-2 R608 A-3 * CN503 B-2
C606 C-2 R609 B-2
C607 C-2 R610 C-2 * D501 C-1
C608 A-3 R611 C-2
C609 B-3 R612 B-2 * R501 B-3
C610 B-2 R613 B-2
C611 B-3 R614 B-2 * S501 C-5
C612 B-2 R615 A-4
C613 C-2 R616 A-4 * VDR501 C-4
C614 A-2 R617 A-4 * VDR502 B-3
C615 A-1 R618 B-2 * VDR503 B-3
C616 A-1 R619 A-4 * VDR504 B-3
C617 B-3 R620 B-3 * VDR505 B-3
C618 A-4 R621 C-2
C619 A-4 R622 C-2
C620 A-4 R623 A-4
C621 A-4 R624 B-4
C622 B-3 R625 B-4
C623 B-3 R627 C-3
C624 B-3 R633 A-4
C625 B-4 R634 B-4
C626 C-4 R635 C-2
C627 C-4 R636 B-4
C630 B-4 R637 C-4
C631 C-4 R638 A-1
C632 C-2 R639 A-3
C633 A-3 R640 C-2
R641 C-2
CN601 A-2 R642 A-3
CN602 B-4 R643 A-3
CN603 B-3
CN605 C-2 RB601 C-3
CN606 A-5

D601 C-2
D602 B-4
D604 B-4

FB601 C-2

IC601 A-3
IC602 C-2

L601 B-2
L602 B-3
L603 A-4

Q601 A-3
Q602 B-3
Q603 C-2
Q604 A-4
Q605 A-4
Q606 A-4
Q607 A-4
Q608 B-4
Q609 B-4
Q610 C-4

Mounted parts location of the VC-352 board is not shown.


Pages from 4-83 to 4-84 are not shown.

PD-213/MS-200
4-82E
DCR-HC40/HC40E

NOTE

5. REPAIR PARTS LIST


NOTE: Characters A to Z of the electrical parts list indicate location of exploded views in which the desired part is shown.

Link EXPLODED VIEWS

A B C

OVERALL CABINET (R) SECTION LCD SECTION BAT. EVF SECTION

2
-35
VC

D E

LENS SECTION CABINET (L) SECTION OVERALL LS CHASSIS BLOCK


(MECHANISM DECK-Z200) ASSEMBLY

MECHANICAL CHASSIS
BLOCK ASSEMBLY

Link ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ACCESSORIES

CD-490 BOARD D JK-260 BOARD E PD-213 BOARD B

FP-836 BOARD B LB-095 BOARD C SE-141 BOARD D

IR-051 BOARD A MS-200 BOARD E VC-352 BOARD E


DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

(ENGLISH) (ENGLISH)
NOTE: When indicating parts by reference number,
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences please include the board name.
from the original one.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine (JAPANESE)
service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.
• The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views
are not supplied.
• Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from
the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set.
• CAPACITORS:
uF: µF (ENGLISH/FRENCH)
• COILS
The components identified by mark 0 or
uH: µH dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
• RESISTORS Replace only with part number specified.
All resistors are in ohms.
Les composants identifiés par une marque
METAL: metal-film resistor 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
F: nonflammable le numéro spécifié.
• SEMICONDUCTORS
In each case, u: µ, for example: (JAPANESE)
uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... ,
uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... , 0 0
uPD..., µPD...

(JAPANESE)

5-1
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS


5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
ns : not supplied

8
16
BAT. EVF section
(See page 5-6)
12
16
9
10 13
D
16
Cabinet (L) section
(See page 5-8)
C
11 14
B

7
52 12 15
-3
VC
ns
3 Lens section
5 ns (See page 5-7)
A MIC901 B 1
A

C
6
1 12
1 4
ns
D
2 16

Cabinet (R) section


(See page 5-4)

1 16

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
1 3-057-082-21 SCREW (M1.7), P2 9 3-089-547-02 COVER (L), JACK
2 A-7112-122-A IR-051 BOARD, COMPLETE 10 3-089-546-11 SHEET, JACK (HC40:J)
3 X-3954-099-1 PANEL (G) ASSY, F (SILVER)(HC40:J) 10 3-089-546-21 SHEET, JACK (EXCEPT HC40:J)
3 X-3954-100-1 PANEL (G) ASSY, F (WHITE) (HC40:J) 11 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
3 X-3954-105-1 PANEL (G) ASSY, F (SILVER)(EXCEPT HC40:J) 12 3-084-523-11 SCREW (M1.7 EG LOCK (BLACK))

3 X-3954-106-1 PANEL (G) ASSY, F (WHITE) (EXCEPT HC40:J) 13 3-089-541-01 LID, CPC
4 3-089-771-01 CUSHION, MICROPHONE 14 3-091-102-01 SHEET, VC ELECTROSTATIC
5 X-3954-215-1 RETAINER ASSY, IR 15 3-089-777-01 SHEET, SHIELD, VC
6 3-078-890-11 SCREW, TAPPING 16 3-091-481-31 SCREW
7 3-089-917-01 CUSHION (F3) MIC901 1-542-513-21 MICROPHONE

8 3-089-543-02 COVER (G), SHOE

5-3
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1-2. CABINET (R) SECTION


ns : not supplied

LCD section
(See page 5-5)

60

58

ns

57

54

A
55
56
53

59

52
51

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
51 3-080-204-31 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 58 3-089-565-01 CUSHION (R), PANEL
52 3-089-432-01 BLIND, HINGE 59 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A)
53 3-078-890-11 SCREW, TAPPING 60 X-3954-101-1 CABINET R (G) ASSY (SILVER)(HC40:J)
54 1-478-482-21 KEY BLOCK, CONTROL (CF6300) 60 X-3954-112-1 CABINET R (G) ASSY (WHITE) (HC40:J)
55 3-080-204-01 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 60 X-3954-113-1 CABINET R (G) ASSY (SILVER)(EXCEPT HC40:J)

56 3-082-519-01 FOOT (R), RUBBER 60 X-3954-114-1 CABINET R (G) ASSY (WHITE) (EXCEPT HC40:J)
57 3-089-430-01 SCREW COVER

5-4
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1-3. LCD SECTION


ns : not supplied

109
111
114
113
108 112
B
LCD901 A
107 110 B

ND901
115
104
ns
106

104

103
102 PD
-21
3A

105

101

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
101 X-3954-196-1 CABINET (C) ASSY, P (SILVER)(HC40) 108 X-3954-070-1 HINGE (63) ASSY
101 X-3954-197-1 CABINET (C) ASSY, P (WHITE) (HC40) 109 A-7112-125-A FP-836 BOARD, COMPLETE
101 X-3954-205-1 CABINET (C) ASSY, P (SILVER)(HC40E) 110 3-089-478-01 COVER (M), HINGE
101 X-3954-206-1 CABINET (C) ASSY, P (WHITE) (HC40E) 111 3-084-523-11 SCREW (M1.7 EG LOCK (BLACK))
102 3-057-082-21 SCREW (M1.7), P2 112 3-089-483-01 CUSHION, PANEL

103 3-941-343-21 TAPE (A) 113 X-3954-069-1 CABINET (M) ASSY, P (EXCEPT HC40:J)
104 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 113 X-3954-084-1 CABINET (M) ASSY (J), P (HC40:J)
105 A-7112-124-A PD-213 BOARD, COMPLETE 114 1-478-483-11 KEY BLOCK, CONTROL (SB6300)
106 1-861-188-11 FP-835 FLEXIBLE BOARD 115 3-091-690-01 SHEET, ADHESIVE,PANEL FLEXIBLE
107 3-089-480-41 COVER (C), HINGE (SILVER) ND901 1-478-462-11 BLOCK, LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (2.5)

107 3-089-480-51 COVER (C), HINGE (WHITE) LCD901 8-753-205-50 ACX528AKP-J

5-5
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1-4. BAT. EVF SECTION


ns : not supplied

159
154
167
153
152
174
158 165
163
151 164 158
162 LCD902

158 166
A ns
A
157 161 168

160 172
156 169
153 173
155 BT901
170
ns
J901
171

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
151 1-861-187-11 FP-834 FLEXIBLE BOARD 165 3-089-417-01 ILLUMINATOR
152 1-793-996-11 CONNECTOR, EXTERNAL (HOT SHOR) 166 3-089-416-01 SHEET, PRISM
153 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 167 X-3954-077-1 EYE CUP ASSY
154 X-3954-076-1 CABINET UPPER ASSY, VF 168 X-3954-075-2 PANEL ASSY, BT
155 1-861-184-11 FP-831 FLEXIBLE BOARD 169 3-089-377-01 COVER, DC-IN

156 3-084-523-11 SCREW (M1.7 EG LOCK (BLACK)) 170 3-078-890-11 SCREW, TAPPING
157 X-3954-079-1 VF SLIDE (G) ASSY 171 1-861-183-11 FP-830 FLEXIBLE BOARD
158 3-057-082-21 SCREW (M1.7), P2 172 3-089-378-01 BT TERMINAL BOARD RETAINER
159 3-089-544-01 LABEL, VF 173 3-089-379-01 SHEET (BT), FLEXIBLE
160 3-089-418-01 SHEET, VF FLEXIBLE FIXED 174 3-091-261-01 SHEET (HS),RADIATION

161 3-089-414-02 CABINET (LOWER), VF BT901 1-780-064-11 BATTERY TERMINAL BOARD


162 A-7112-264-A LB-095 BOARD, COMPLETE J901 1-815-792-11 CONNECTOR, DC-IN (7.2V)
163 3-089-419-01 CUSHION, LCD LCD902 8-753-208-78 LCX059AKA-J
164 3-089-415-01 GUIDE, LAMP

5-6
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1-5. LENS SECTION

213

212
211
IC201
210

209
208
206

207
214
205

204 203 201


202

Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager”


on page 4-5 when changing the CCD imager.
4-6

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
201 3-084-523-11 SCREW (M1.7 EG LOCK (BLACK)) 209 3-080-204-21 SCREW, TAPPING, P2
202 A-7112-151-A SE-141 BOARD, COMPLETE 210 A-7112-117-A CD-490 BOARD, COMPLETE
203 3-089-525-01 FRAME (G), LENS 211 3-088-645-01 RUBBER (Z), SEAL
204 3-080-204-01 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 212 1-788-061-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL
205 3-089-527-01 HEAT SINK (G), CD 213 A-7112-105-A 841A (CZ) BLOCK ASSY

206 3-089-526-01 SHEET (G), CD RADIATION 214 3-091-260-01 SHEET, INSULATING, CD


207 1-861-181-11 FP-828 FLEXIBLE BOARD IC201 A-7112-341-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (1M) (CCD IMAGER)
208 3-090-165-01 SHEET, RADIATION (IC201 is not included in this COMPLETE board.)

5-7
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1-6. CABINET (L) SECTION


ns : not supplied

260 258
262

263 268
C
SP901 264 258
267
252 Mechanism deck
258 (See page 5-9 to 5-11)
259 D
269
ns
H ns 258
ns
A 257 255 F
G
ns E
B
271
272
H B
G
D 256 F C
A 270 E
ns
253
2
ns -35
VC
252 -
MS0 265
20 258 271 258
BT501 255
251 266
254

: BT501 (Lithium battery) MS-200 board on the mount position. (See page 4-73) 261
258
CAUTION :
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
251 X-3954-115-2 CABINET (64) ASSY, G (HC40:J) 262 A-7112-123-A JK-260 BOARD, COMPLETE
251 X-3954-116-2 CABINET (64) ASSY, G (EXCEPT HC40:J) 263 1-861-186-11 FP-833 FLEXIBLE BOARD
252 3-080-204-01 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 264 X-3954-072-2 FRAME ASSY, CS
253 3-089-513-01 SHAFT (REAR), GRIP BELT 265 3-062-214-01 SCREW (M1.4X1.5)
254 A-7112-120-A MS-200 BOARD, COMPLETE 266 1-828-833-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FFC-036)

255 3-078-890-11 SCREW, TAPPING 267 3-089-548-01 SHEET, DRUM


256 1-861-185-11 FP-832 FLEXIBLE BOARD 268 3-089-540-01 KNOB, EJECT
257 3-078-893-01 0 PLATE +P2 MAIN EG GRIP M1.7 269 X-3954-074-2 FRAME ASSY, MD
258 3-084-523-11 SCREW (M1.7 EG LOCK (BLACK)) 270 3-081-221-01 LABEL (Z) LS
259 3-089-510-01 BELT, GRIP 271 3-089-521-01 SHEET, VC

260 1-478-481-41 KEY BLOCK, CONTROL (SS6300) (EXCEPT HC40:J) 272 A-7112-785-A VC-352 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)(HC40)
260 1-478-481-51 KEY BLOCK, CONTROL (SS6300) (HC40:J) 272 A-7113-240-A VC-352 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)(HC40E)
261 3-089-520-01 SCREW SP901 1-825-260-21 LOUD SPEAKER (1.6CM)

5-8
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1-7. OVERALL (MECHANISM DECK-Z200)


ns : not supplied

703

704 707
711

705

706

710
707
709 712

708
702

M901
LS chassis block assembly
(See page 5-10)

Mechanical chassis
701 block assembly
(See page 5-11)

716
715

713

714
Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
701 X-3952-938-7 GEAR ASSY, GOOSENECK 710 X-3952-937-1 TABLE ASSY, T REEL
702 3-075-097-11 SCREW (M1.4X1.4), SPECIAL HEAD 711 3-079-366-01 RELEASE, REEL LOCK
703 3-079-206-02 SPRING (POP UP S), TXTENSION 712 X-3953-257-4 PLATE ASSY,RETAINER
704 X-3952-939-8 COMPARTMENT ASSY, CASSETTE 713 A-7095-947-A MD (Z200) SUB ASSY
705 3-079-367-01 DAMPER, CASSETTE COMPARTMENT 714 3-079-741-02 SCREW,DRUM FIXING

706 3-079-215-02 SPRING (POP UP T), EXTENSION 715 3-748-682-01 WASHER, T


707 3-085-330-01 SCREW, SPECIAL 716 3-087-881-01 SHEET, ADHESIVE, FLEXIBLE
708 3-080-545-01 COVER, SENSOR S M901 A-7048-994-A DRUM (DEH-30B-R) (SERVICE)
709 3-079-364-01 RETAINER, LS GUIDE

5-9
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1-8. LS CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY


ns : not supplied
765
762
761 766
MIC902
Q901
763
774 ns
760

D901 FP-826
(Note)

769
759 773
H901 Q902 770
758 768
H902
771
S903 764

757 772
767

756

755 754

753
ns
752

751 Note: FP-826 is included in the LS block assy and is attached


to chassis by hot-press.
Because installation of FP-826 requires a very high
accuracy, FP-826 is not supplied as an independent
service parts.

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
751 A-7095-402-G BRAKE (T) BLOCK ASSY 767 3-079-243-02 SPRING (PINCH RETURN), TORSION
752 3-079-241-01 PLATE, LS CAM 768 X-3952-934-1 ARM ASSY, PINCH
753 3-075-097-11 SCREW (M1.4X1.4), SPECIAL HEAD 769 3-052-062-02 NUT, TG7
754 3-079-246-01 SPRING(RELEASE RACK),EXTENSION 770 3-079-219-02 TG7
755 3-079-248-01 POSITIONING(S), CASSETTE 771 3-081-591-01 SPRING, COMPRESSION (TG7)

756 3-079-244-01 SPRING (ULE), EXTENSION 772 X-3952-935-3 ARM ASSY, TG7
757 X-3952-932-1 BRAKE ASSY, ULE 773 3-079-237-01 ADJUSTOR, BAND
758 3-079-245-01 RACK (S), RELEASE 774 A-7095-403-B TG2 ARM BLOCK ASSY
759 3-079-247-01 BRAKE (S) S903 1-529-566-51 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY)(C.C. DOWN)
760 3-059-090-11 SCREW (M1.4X2.5), SPECIAL HEAD MIC902 1-817-175-12 PIN, CONNECTOR (WITH DETECTION SWITCH)

761 3-079-242-01 SPRING, TENSION D901 6-500-652-01 DIODE GL453SE0000F (TAPE LED)
762 A-7095-951-A LS BLOCK ASSY H901 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (S REEL)
763 3-079-267-01 HOLDER (S), SENSOR H902 8-719-067-74 ELEMENT, HOLE HW-105A-CDE-T (T REEL)
764 3-079-268-01 HOLDER (T), SENSOR Q901 6-550-672-01 TRANSISTOR PT4850FJE00F (TAPE END)
765 X-3952-936-2 TABLE ASSY, S REEL Q902 6-550-672-01 TRANSISTOR PT4850FJE00F (TAPE TOP)

766 3-085-330-01 SCREW, SPECIAL

5-10
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1-9. MECHANICAL CHASSIS BLOCK ASSEMBLY 827


ns : not supplied
809
813
806 M902
816

S902 822 820

814
811 812 815

829
816 821
810
819 830
825

826
817 823
807
818
808
824

828

805 ns

803

804 802
ns
801

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
801 3-079-314-01 SPRING (EJ), EXTENSION 818 3-079-309-01 GEAR, DECELERATION
802 3-079-327-01 ARM, EJ 819 X-3952-942-2 ROLLER ASSY, TG3
803 3-079-323-01 GEAR, CONVERSION 820 3-079-325-01 RAIL, GUIDE
804 3-079-324-03 ARM, GL DRIVING 821 3-079-295-02 SPRING, TG5
805 X-3952-928-1 GL (S) ASSY 822 1-677-049-11 FP-228 FLEXIBLE BOARD (DEW SENSOR)

806 3-079-315-01 ROLLER (S1), LS GUIDE 823 3-079-328-01 SCREW (M1.4), SPECIAL HEAD
807 X-3952-925-1 ARM ASSY, LS 824 3-079-326-04 SUPPORT, TG7
808 3-079-320-01 ROLLER, LS 825 3-079-301-01 SPRING (GLT), TORSION
809 3-079-316-01 ROLLER (S2), LS GUIDE 826 3-079-298-01 GEAR (T), GL
810 3-079-319-01 GEAR, CAM 827 1-686-798-11 FP-467 FLEXIBLE BOARD

811 X-3952-941-1 SLIDER ASSY (N), M 828 X-3952-927-4 COASTER (S) ASSY
812 3-079-321-02 SPRING (PINCH), EXTENSION 829 X-3952-930-3 ROLLER ASSY, TG5
813 X-3952-940-2 PLATE ASSY (N), TG2 CAM 830 X-3952-929-7 COASTER (T) ASSY
814 3-079-312-01 SHIELD, MOTOR M902 A-7095-396-A MOTOR BLOCK ASSY, L (LOARDING)
815 3-079-307-02 HOLDER, MOTOR S902 1-477-679-11 ROTARY, ENCODER (MODE SWITCH)

816 3-085-330-01 SCREW, SPECIAL


817 3-079-308-01 SHAFT, WORM

5-11
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

• EXCEPT J MODEL
Checking supplied accessories.
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.

Lid Battery
Case
(3-083-973-01)
Power cord (Main lead) (1) AC adaptor (1) Rechargeable battery pack (1) Wireless Remote Commander (1)
(AUS model) (AC-L25A) (NP-FP50) (RMT-831)
0 1-696-819-21 (EXCEPT BR model) (not supplied) 1-477-898-41
Power cord (Main lead) (1) 0 1-477-534-11
(BR, AEP, EE, NE,
E:EXCEPT Saudi Arabia model)
0 1-769-608-11
Power cord (Main lead) (1)
(KR model)
0 1-776-985-11 A/V connecting cable USB cable (1) Cleaning cloth (1) Shoe cover (1)
Power cord (Main lead) (1) (1.5m) (1) 1-824-382-21 3-073-861-01 3-089-543-01
(CH model) 1-823-156-13
0 1-782-476-13
Power cord (Main lead) (1)
(UK, HK, E:Saudi Arabia model)
0 1-783-374-11
Power cord (Main lead) (1)
(US, CND model) “Memory Stick Duo” (1) Memory Stick Duo adaptor (1) CD-ROM
0 1-790-107-22 (not supplied) (not supplied) (SPVD-012(V) USB Driver) (1)
Power cord (Main lead) (1) (US,CND model)
(JE model) 3-086-790-01
0 1-790-732-12 CD-ROM
(SPVD-012 USB Driver) (1)
(EXCEPT US, CND model)
3-087-821-01

21-pin adaptor (1) 2-pin conversion adaptor (1) 2-pin conversion adaptor (1)
(AEP, UK, EE, NE model) (JE model) (E, HK model)
1-770-783-21 1-569-007-12 1-569-008-12

• Abbreviation Note : Note :


CND : Canadian model CH : Chinese model The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
EE : East European model JE : Tourist model mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
NE : North European model KR : Korea model 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
HK : Hong Kong model BR : Brazlian model specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
AUS : Australian model

Other accessories
3-087-936-11 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) 3-088-338-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (HUNGARIAN/SLOVAK)
(HC40:US,CND,E,HK,JE/HC40E:AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS,JE) (HC40E:EE)
3-087-936-21 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (FRENCH) 3-088-339-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)
(HC40:CND/HC40E:AEP,E,JE) (HC40:US,CND,E,HK,JE)
3-087-936-31 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (GERMAN/DUTCH) 3-088-339-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH)(HC40:CND)
(HC40E:AEP) 3-088-339-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE)
3-087-936-41 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (HC40:E,JE)
(HC40:E,JE/HC40E:AEP) 3-088-339-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE)
3-087-936-51 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/GREEK) (HC40:E,HK)
(HC40E:AEP)
3-088-339-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(HC40:KR,JE)
3-087-936-61 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH/RUSSIAN) 3-088-340-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)
(HC40E:NE,JE) (HC40E:AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS,JE)
3-087-936-71 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (DANISH/FINNISH) 3-088-340-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH)(HC40E:AEP,E,JE)
(HC40E:NE) 3-088-340-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE)
3-087-936-81 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (POLISH/CZECH) (HC40E:AEP)
(HC40E:EE) 3-088-340-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/GREEK)(HC40E:AEP)
3-087-936-91 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (HUNGARIAN/SLOVAK)
(HC40E:EE) 3-088-340-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (GERMAN/DUTCH)(HC40E:AEP)
3-087-937-11 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (ARABIC/PERSIAN) 3-088-340-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH/RUSSIAN)
(HC40E:E) (HC40E:NE,JE)
3-088-340-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (DANISH/FINNISH)(HC40E:NE)
3-087-937-21 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL) 3-088-340-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC/PERSIAN)(HC40E:E)
(HC40:E,HK/HC40E:HK) 3-088-340-91 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE)
3-087-937-31 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (SIMPLIFIED) (HC40E:HK)
(HC40E:E,CH,JE)
3-087-937-41 MANUAL (PC), INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(HC40:KR,JE) 3-088-341-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)
3-088-338-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (POLISH/CZECH)(HC40E:EE) (HC40E:E,CH,JE)

5-12
DCR-HC40/HC40E
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

• J MODEL

5-13
DCR-HC40/HC40E
CD-490 FP-836 IR-051 JK-260

5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST


Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
A-7112-117-A CD-490 BOARD, COMPLETE A-7112-122-A IR-051 BOARD, COMPLETE
*********************** **********************
(IC201 is not included in this COMPLETE board)
< CAPACITOR >
< CAPACITOR >
C601 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10.00% 50V
C202 1-164-004-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 25V C602 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V
C203 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V
C204 1-113-987-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20.00% 25V < CONNECTOR >
C205 1-127-573-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V
C207 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V CN601 1-778-507-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 4P
CN602 1-766-346-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 16P
C208 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V
C209 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V < DIODE >
C210 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
C213 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V D601 6-500-512-01 DIODE CL-330IRS-X-TU
C214 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20.00% 6.3V D602 6-500-506-01 DIODE TLRMV1021(T15SOY,F)
D604 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17
C215 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
C218 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20.00% 10V < FERRITE BEAD >
C219 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V
FB601 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0uH
< CONNECTOR > FB602 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0uH

CN201 1-818-087-31 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 26P < IC >

< FERRITE BEAD > IC601 8-742-221-00 IC SBX3055-01

FB201 1-414-760-21 FERRITE 0UH < JACK >

< IC > J601 1-691-737-41 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (MIC (PLUG IN POWER))

IC201 A-7112-341-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (1M) (CCD IMAGER) < RESISTOR >
(IC201 is not included in this COMPLETE board)
IC202 6-701-755-01 IC AD80017AJRURL R601 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W
R604 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
< COIL >
< SWITCH >
L201 1-400-588-11 INDUCTOR 0uH
L202 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH S601 1-786-148-11 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (LENS COVER OPEN/CLOSE)

< TRANSISTOR > < VARISTOR >

Q201 6-550-119-01 TRANSISTOR DTC144EMT2L VDR601 1-801-862-11 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608)


Q202 8-729-055-21 TRANSISTOR 2SC5096-O/R(TE85L) VDR602 1-801-862-11 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608)
************************************************************
< RESISTOR >
A-7112-123-A JK-260 BOARD, COMPLETE
R201 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 **********************
R203 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
R204 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W < CONNECTOR >
R205 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R206 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W CN701 1-815-794-21 CONNECTOR (MULTIPLE) (AV IN/OUT)
************************************************************ CN702 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE(USB 5P) (USB)
CN703 1-794-276-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE 4P ( DV)
A-7112-125-A FP-836 BOARD, COMPLETE CN704 1-784-421-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 27P
**********************
< DIODE >
< SWITCH >
D702 6-500-750-01 DIODE NSAD500H-T1-A
S101 1-786-179-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (PANEL REVERSE) D703 8-719-078-02 DIODE 1SS357(T3SONY1)
************************************************************
< JACK >
Be sure to read “Precautions upon replacing CCD imager”
on page 4-5 when changing the CCD imager. J701 1-793-995-11 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE ( LANC)
4-6 < LINE FILTER >

LF701 1-456-583-11 INDUCTOR 0uH

5-14
DCR-HC40/HC40E
JK-260 LB-095 MS-200 PD-213

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
< RESISTOR > A-7112-124-A PD-213 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
R701 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R702 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W < CAPACITOR >
************************************************************
C602 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10.00% 50V
A-7112-264-A LB-095 BOARD, COMPLETE C604 1-125-841-91 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20.00% 4V
********************** C605 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
C606 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
< CAPACITOR > C607 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V

C301 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V C608 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
C302 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C610 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
C303 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V C611 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20.00% 10V
C612 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5.00% 50V
< CONNECTOR > C614 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10.00% 16V

CN301 1-818-046-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 20P C615 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10.00% 16V
CN302 1-784-420-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 21P C616 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10.00% 16V
C617 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
< DIODE > C618 1-125-889-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V
C622 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V
D302 8-719-074-67 DIODE EDZ-TE61-5.6B
D303 6-500-875-01 DIODE E1S35-AW0C7-01-A3 C623 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V
C624 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
< RESISTOR > C626 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
C627 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
R302 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W C631 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
R303 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W
R304 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W C633 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V
R305 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
************************************************************ < CONNECTOR >

A-7112-120-A MS-200 BOARD, COMPLETE CN601 1-816-179-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 22P
*********************** CN602 1-573-915-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 6P
CN603 1-691-344-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 6P
< BATTERY > CN605 1-785-905-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P
CN606 1-691-344-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 6P
0 BT501 1-756-128-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY)
< DIODE >
< CONNECTOR >
D601 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17
CN501 1-691-352-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 14P D602 8-719-074-67 DIODE EDZ-TE61-5.6B
CN502 1-778-506-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 2P
CN503 1-817-913-11 MEMORY STICK DUO CONNECTOR < FERRITE BEAD >

< DIODE > FB601 1-414-760-21 FERRITE 0uH

D501 6-500-506-01 DIODE TLRMV1021(T15SOY,F) < IC >

< RESISTOR > IC601 8-759-693-13 IC NJM12904V(TE2)


IC602 8-752-109-72 IC CXM3006R-T4
R501 1-218-941-81 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W
< COIL >
< SWITCH >
L601 1-400-588-11 INDUCTOR 0uH
S501 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (RESET) L602 1-400-588-11 INDUCTOR 0uH
L603 1-400-588-11 INDUCTOR 0uH
< ABSORBER >

VDR501 1-805-043-11 ABSORBER, CHIP SURGE


************************************************************
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
CAUTION : Replace only with part number specified.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour
la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

0 0

5-15
DCR-HC40/HC40E
PD-213 SE-141 VC-352

< TRANSISTOR > C410 1-119-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10.00% 10V
C411 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
Q601 8-729-427-42 TRANSISTOR XP4211-TXE C412 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
Q602 8-729-427-12 TRANSISTOR XP4111-TXE
Q603 6-550-237-01 TRANSISTOR 2SC5658T2LQ/R C413 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
Q604 6-550-237-01 TRANSISTOR 2SC5658T2LQ/R C414 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
Q605 6-550-237-01 TRANSISTOR 2SC5658T2LQ/R C416 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V

Q606 8-729-420-24 TRANSISTOR 2SB1218A-QRS-TX < CONNECTOR >


Q607 8-729-420-24 TRANSISTOR 2SB1218A-QRS-TX
Q608 6-550-119-01 TRANSISTOR DTC144EMT2L CN401 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P
Q609 6-550-232-01 TRANSISTOR 2SA2029T2LQ/R
Q610 6-550-232-01 TRANSISTOR 2SA2029T2LQ/R < FERRITE BEAD >

< RESISTOR > FB401 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH


FB402 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
R606 1-208-943-11 METAL CHIP 220K 0.5% 1/16W FB403 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
R607 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W FB404 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
R608 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W
R609 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W < IC >
R610 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0
IC401 8-759-489-19 IC uPC6756GR-8JG-E2
R611 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R613 1-220-206-11 METAL CHIP 91K 0.5% 1/16W < COIL >
R614 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W
R615 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W L401 1-400-588-11 INDUCTOR 0uH
R616 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W
< RESISTOR >
R617 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R619 1-208-647-11 METAL CHIP 33 0.5% 1/16W R402 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R620 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R403 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R623 1-208-647-11 METAL CHIP 33 0.5% 1/16W R404 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W
R624 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R405 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W

R625 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W < COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK >
R627 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W
R633 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 RB401 1-234-379-21 RES, NETWORK 22KX4 (1005)
R634 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R635 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W < SENSOR >

R636 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W SE401 1-476-807-41 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (PITCH)
R637 1-218-978-11 RES-CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W SE402 1-476-807-31 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (YAW)
R638 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W ************************************************************
R639 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
R640 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W VC-352 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
R641 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
R642 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W
R643 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

< COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK > Electrical parts list of the VC-352 board
RB601 1-234-369-21 RES, NETWORK 10X4 (1005) are not shown.
************************************************************ Pages from 5-17 to 5-25 are not shown.
A-7112-151-A SE-141 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************

< CAPACITOR >

C401 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V


C402 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
C403 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
C405 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V
C406 1-119-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10.00% 10V

C408 1-119-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10.00% 10V


C409 1-119-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10.00% 10V

5-16E
DCR-HC40/HC40E

Sony EMCS Co. 2004A1600-1


9-876-703-31 ©2004.1
— 86 — Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
ENGLISH JAPANESE

[Description of main button functions on toolbar of the Adobe Acrobat Reader Ver5.0 (for Windows)]

Toolbar

Printing a text Reversing the screens displayed once


1. Click the Print button . • To reverse the previous screens (operation) one by one, click
2. Specify a printer, print range, number of copies, and other op- the .
tions, and then click [OK]. • To advance the reversed screens (operation) one by one, click
the .
Application of printing:
To set a range to be printed within a page, select the graphic
Application to the Service Manual:
selection tool and drag on the page to enclose a range to
This function allows you to go and back between circuit dia-
be printed, and then click the Print button. gram and printed circuit board diagram, and accordingly it
will be convenient for the voltage check.

Finding a text
1. Click the Find button . Moving with link
2. Enter a character string to be found into a text box, and click
the [Find]. (Specify the find options as necessary) 1. Select either palm tool , zoom tool , text selection tool
, or graphic selection tool .
Application to the Service Manual: 2. Place the pointer in the position in a text where the link exists
To execute “find” from current page toward the previous pages, (such as a button on cover and the table of contents page, or
select the check box “Find Backward” and then click the blue characters on the removal flowchart page or drawing
“Find”. page), and the pointer will change to the forefinger form .
3. Then, click the link. (You will go to the link destination.)

Moving with bookmark:


Click an item (text) on the bookmark pallet, and you can move
to the link destination. Also, clicking can display the
hidden items.
(To go back to original state, click )
3. Open the find dialog box again, and click the [Find Again] and
you can find the matched character strings displayed next.
(Character strings entered previously are displayed as they are
in the text box.)

Application to the Service Manual:


The parts on the drawing pages (block diagrams, circuit dia-
grams, printed circuit boards) and parts list pages in a text
can be found using this find function. For example, find a
Ref. No. of IC on the block diagram, and click the [Find Again]
continuously, so that you can move to the Ref. No. of IC on Zooming or rotating the screen display
the circuit diagram or printed circuit board diagram succes- “Zoom in/out”
sively. • Click the triangle button in the zoom control box to select the
Note: The find function may not be applied to the Service display magnification. Or, you may click or for zoom-
Manual depending on the date of issue.
ing in or out.

Switching a page
• To move to the first page, click the .
• To move to the last page, click the . “Rotate”
• To move to the previous page, click the . • Click rotate tool , and the page then rotates 90 degrees each.

• To move to the next page, click the .


Application to the Service Manual:
The printed circuit board diagram you see now can be changed
to the same direction as the set.
ENGLISH JAPANESE
Reverse 987670331.pdf

Revision History

S.M. Rev.
Ver. Date History Contents
issued
1.0 2004.01 Official Release — —
DCR-HC40/HC40E RMT-831

Ver 1.0 2004. 01 SECTION 6 ADJ


Revision History ADJUSTMENTS
How to use
Acrobat Reader

Link
Before starting adjustment VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS

SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT


CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
INITIALIZATION OF 8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E, 1F PAGE DATA
AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT SERVICE MODE


LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER

DATA PROCESS
MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT
SERVICE MODE
HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT CCASSETTE

HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE WITHOUT CCASSETTE

TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT

Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service Manual


CONTENTS LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3
1. SERVICE NOTE a ✕
2. DISASSEMBLY a ✕
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS OVERALL ✕
POWER
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND CD-490, PD-213, LB-095, SE-141, VC-352 BOARD
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS JK-260, IR-051, MS-200, FP-836 BOARD,
CONTROL KEY BLOCK (SB6300,
SS6300, CF6300), FP-228, FP-467,
FP-826, FP-830 FLEXIBLE
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST EXPLODED VIEWS ✕
ELECTRICAL PARTS a (VC-352 BOARD)
DCR-HC40/HC40E

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6. ADJUSTMENT 16. Steady Shot Check ························································· 6-33
1. Before starting adjustment ··············································· 6-1 1-4. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards. ··· 6-2 ADJUSTMENT ····························································· 6-34
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 6-4 1. EVF Automatic Adjustment (VC-352 board) ················ 6-34
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT 2. White Balance Adjustment (VC-352 board) ················· 6-35
(CAMERA SECTION) ··················································· 6-4 1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 6-36
1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 6-4 1. LCD Automatic Adjustment (PD-213 board) ················ 6-36
1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 6-5 2. V COM Adjustment (PD-213 board) ···························· 6-37
1-1-3. Precaution ········································································ 6-7 3. Transmissive Mode White Balance Adjustment
1. Setting the Switch ···························································· 6-7 (PD-213 board) ······························································ 6-37
2. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 6-7 4. Reflective Mode White Balance Adjustment
3. Subjects ··········································································· 6-7 (PD-213 board) ······························································ 6-38
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF 8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, 18, 19, 6-2. MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT ·················· 6-39
1B, 1C, 1E, 1F PAGE DATA ··········································· 6-8 2-1. HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT
1-2-1. LOADING OF FLASH MEMORY PROGRAM ············ 6-8 CASSETTE ··································································· 6-39
1. Preparation ······································································· 6-8 2-2. HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE WITHOUT
2. Loader Writing Permission Mode Setting ······················· 6-8 CASSETTE ··································································· 6-39
3. Loading Method ······························································ 6-8 2-3. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT ········································ 6-39
4. Program Version Check ··················································· 6-8 1. Preparation for Adjustment ··········································· 6-39
5. Loader Writing Inhibit Mode Setting ······························ 6-8 2. Processing after Completing Operations: ······················ 6-39
6. Check of Loader Writing Inhibit Mode ··························· 6-8 6-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT ······························ 6-40
1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF A, B, D, 1A, 1B PAGE DATA ···· 6-9 3-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS ············ 6-40
1. Initializing the A, B, D, 1A, 1B Page Data ····················· 6-9 3-1-1. Equipment to Required ·················································· 6-40
2. Modification of A, B, D, 1A, 1B Page Data ···················· 6-9 3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting ··············································· 6-41
3. A Page Table ·································································· 6-10 3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors ···················································· 6-42
4. B Page Table ·································································· 6-10 3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment ············································ 6-42
5. D Page Table ·································································· 6-10 3-1-5. Alignment Tapes ···························································· 6-43
6. 1A Page Table ································································ 6-10 3-1-6. Input/Output Level and Impedance ······························· 6-43
7. 1B Page Table ································································ 6-10 3-2. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ········ 6-44
1-2-3. INITIALIZATION OF 8, C, 18, 1C PAGE DATA ········ 6-11 1. Initialization of 8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, 18, 19,
1. Initializing the 8, C, 18, 1C Page Data ·························· 6-11 1B, 1C, 1E, 1F Page Data ·············································· 6-44
2. Modification of 8, C, 18, 1C Page Data ························ 6-11 2. Touch Panel Adjustment ················································ 6-44
3. 8 Page Table ··································································· 6-12 3. Serial No. Input ····························································· 6-45
4. C Page Table ·································································· 6-13 3-1. Company ID Input ························································· 6-45
5. 18 Page Table ································································· 6-14 3-2. Serial No. Input ····························································· 6-45
6. 1C Page Table ································································ 6-14 3-3. SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··············· 6-47
1-2-4. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F PAGE DATA ··· 6-15 1. Cap FG Duty Adjustment (VC-352 Board) ··················· 6-47
1. Initializing the E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data ·············· 6-15 2. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-352 Board) ·········· 6-47
2. Modification of E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data ············· 6-15 3. Error Rate Check ··························································· 6-48
3. E Page Table ·································································· 6-16 3-1. Preparations before adjustments ···································· 6-48
4. F Page Table ·································································· 6-17 3-2. Error Rate Check ··························································· 6-48
5. 14 Page Table ································································· 6-18 3-3. Processing after Completing Adjustments ···················· 6-48
6. 19 Page Table ································································· 6-19 3-4. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 6-49
7. 1E Page Table ································································ 6-19 1. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-352 Board) ···· 6-49
8. 1F Page Table ································································ 6-20 2. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 6-21 (VC-352 Board) ····························································· 6-49
1. 54MHz/66MHz Origin Oscillation Check 3. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-352 Board) ··· 6-50
(VC-352 board) ····························································· 6-21 3-5. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ···························· 6-51
2. HALL Adjustment ························································· 6-22 1. Playback Level Check ··················································· 6-52
3. MR Adjustment ····························································· 6-23 2. Overall Level Characteristics Check ····························· 6-52
4. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) ······· 6-24 3. Overall Distortion Check ··············································· 6-52
5. Flange Back Adjustment(Using Flange Back Adjustment 4. Overall Noise Level Check ············································ 6-52
Chart and Subject More Than 500m Away) ·················· 6-25 5. Overall Separation Check ·············································· 6-52
5-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) ·········································· 6-25 6-4. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-53
5-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) ·········································· 6-25 4-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER ················ 6-53
6. Flange Back Check ························································ 6-26 1. Using the adjustment remote commander ····················· 6-53
7. MAX GAIN Adjustment ··············································· 6-26 2. Precautions upon using the adjustment
8. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ···································· 6-27 remote commander ························································ 6-53
9. Picture Frame Setting 4-2. DATA PROCESS ··························································· 6-54
(Color Reproduction Adjustment Frame) ······················ 6-28 4-3. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-55
10. Color Reproduction Adjustment ···································· 6-29 1. Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 6-55
11. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame) ····················· 6-30 2. Emergence Memory Address (Camera section) ············ 6-55
12. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input ····················· 6-30 2-1. EMG Code (Emergency Code) ······································ 6-55
13. LV Standard Data Input ················································· 6-31 3. Emergence Memory Address (Mechanism section) ······ 6-55
14. Auto White Balance Adjustment ··································· 6-31 3-1. EMG Code (Emergency Code) ····································· 6-55
15. White Balance Check ···················································· 6-32 3-2. MSW Code ···································································· 6-56

—2—
DCR-HC40/HC40E

4. Bit value discrimination ················································ 6-57


5. Switch check (1) ···························································· 6-57
6. Switch check (2) ···························································· 6-57
7. Switch check (3) ···························································· 6-57
8. Switch check (4) ···························································· 6-58
9. Switch check (5) ···························································· 6-58
10. Switch check (6) ···························································· 6-58
11. LED check ····································································· 6-59
12. Record of Use check (1) ················································ 6-59
13. Record of Use check (2) ················································ 6-59
14. Record of Self-diagnosis check ····································· 6-60

* Color reproduction frame is shown on page 6-61.

—3—
DCR-HC40/HC40E
SECTION 6
ADJUSTMENTS

1. Before starting adjustment

EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board


The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct.
Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.

Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board
is replaced.
(Machine before starting repair) (Machine after a board is replaced)
PC PC

Save the EVR data Download the saved


to a personal computer. data to a machine.

Procedure 2
Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM
to the replaced board.
Remove the EEPROM and install it.

(Former board) (New board)

Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or
installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired)

Download the data.

Save the data.

(The same model of the same destination)

After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the


respective items of the EVR data.
(Refer to page 6-3 for the items to be checked.)

6-1
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards.


• Adjusting items when replacing main parts
When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Note: When replacing the drum assy. or the mechanism deck, reset the data of page: 7, address: A7 to A9 to “00”. (Refer to “Record of Use check” of
“6-4. SERVICE MODE”)
Replaced parts
Block replacement Parts replacement

VC-352 board IC9301 (RGB driver, Timing generator (EVF))


VC-352 board IC6401 (DV signal process,RF signal process)
PD-213 board IC602 (RGB driver, Timing generator (LCD))

VC-352 board IC6201 (Camera DV signal process, etc.)


VC-352 board IC5001, X5001 (Timing generator)
SE-141 board SE401/402 (PITCH /YAW sensor)
Mechanism deck M901 (Drum assy) (Note)

VC-352 board IC7101 (Video IN/OUT)


VC-352 board IC6501 (REC/PB AMP)
LB-095 board D303 (backlight (EVF))
Adjustment Adjustment

CD-490 board IC201 (CCD imager)

VC-352 board IC5003 (,A/D conv.)


Section

LCD block LCD901 (LCD panel)

EVFblock LCD903 (LCD panel)

CD-490 board IC202 (S/H)


LCD block (backlight LED)
Mechanism deck (Note)

Mechanism MD block
Lens device

Initialization of 8, Loading of flash memory program


A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, Initialization of A, B, D, 1A, 1B page data
18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, Initialization of 8, C, 18, 1C page data
1E, 1F page data Initialization of E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F page data
54MHz/66MHz origin oscillation check z
HALL adj. z
MR adj. z
Flange back adj. z z
MAX GAIN adj. z z z
Camera Mechanical shutter adj. z
Color reproduction adj. z z z
AWB standard data input z z z
LV standard data input z z z
Auto white balance adj. z z z
Steady shot check z
EVF automatic adj. z z
Color EVF
White balance adj. z z z
LCD automatic adj. z z
V COM adj. z z
LCD
Transmissive mode white balance adj. z z z
Reflective mode white balance adj. z z z
Mechanism Tape path adj. z z z
Touch panel adj. z
System control
Serial No. input
CAP FG duty adj. z z
Servo, RF Switching position adj. z z z
Error rate check z z z zz
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. z z
Video
S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj. z z
Table. 6-1-1(1).

6-2
DCR-HC40/HC40E

• Adjusting items when replacing a board or EEPROM


When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.

Board EEPROM
replacement replacement

VC-352 board IC8503 (Flash memory)


Adjustment Adjustment

VC-352 board IC8802 (EEPROM)


VC-352 board IC8402 (EEPROM)
Section

CD-490 board (COMPLETE)

VC-352 board (COMPLETE)


LB-095 board (COMPLETE)
PD-213 board (COMPLETE)
SE-141 board (COMPLETE)

Supporting
Initialization of 8, Loading of flash memory program z
A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, Initialization of A, B, D, 1A, 1B page data z z z
18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, Initialization of 8, C, 18, 1C page data z z
1E, 1F page data Initialization of E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F page data z z
54MHz/66MHz origin oscillation check z
HALL adj. z z z
MR adj. z z z
Flange back adj. z z z z
MAX GAIN adj. z z z z
Camera Mechanical shutter adj. z z z
Color reproduction adj. z z z
AWB standard data input z z z z
LV standard data input z z z z
Auto white balance adj. z z z z
Steady shot check zz z z
EVF automatic adj. z z z
Color EVF
White balance adj. z z z
LCD automatic adj. z z z z
V COM adj. z z z
LCD
Transmissive mode white balance adj. z z z
Reflective mode white balance adj. z z z z
Mechanism Tape path adj.
Touch panel adj. z z z
System control
Serial No. input z z
CAP FG duty adj. z z z
Servo, RF Switching position adj. z z z
Error rate check z z z
S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. z z
Video
S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj. z z
Table. 6-1-1(2).

6-3
DCR-HC40/HC40E

6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT


1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION)

1-1-1. List of Service Tools


• Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Vectorscope

J-1 J-2 J-3


ND filter 1.0
J-6080-808-A
Filter for color
temperature correction ND filter 0.4 Pattern box PTB-450
(C14) J-6080-806-A J-6082-200-A
J-6080-058-A
ND filter 0.1
J-6080-807-A

J-4 J-5 J-6

Adjustment remote
Color chart for commander Siemens star chart
pattern box (RM-95 upgraded) J-6080-875-A
J-6020-250-A J-6082-053-B

J-7 J-8 J-9

Clear chart for


Mini pattern box Camera table
pattern box
J-6082-353-B J-608A-384-A
J-6080-621-A

J-10
A
A: CPC-15
J-6082-564-A

B: I/F unit for


LANC control
B J-6082-521-A

Fig. 6-1-1.

6-4
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-1-2. Preparations
Note1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2. Pattern box
DISASSEMBLY”.
Note2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards
need not be disassembled.
Note3: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0,
address: 10 is “00”. If not, set data: 00 to this address.

1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1- 1.0 m


3.

Note4: As removing the MS-200 board (removing CN1205 of the VC-


352 board) means removing the lithium 3V power supply (BT501
on the MS-200 board), data such as date, time, user-set menus
will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data.
But the self-diagnosis data and the data on history of use (total
Front of the lens
drum rotation time etc.) will be kept even if the lithium 3V power
supply is removed. (Refer to “6-4.Service Mode” for the self-
diagnosis data and the data on history of use.)

Note5: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode


1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: A, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
button.
The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned Fig. 6-1-2.
on with the control key block (SS6300) removed. After completing
adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”.
(Operate the camera functions using the touch panel. When the
control key block (SS6300) is removed, the function buttons of
the adjustment remote commander are not effective even if the
HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander is set to the
OFF position.)

Note6: Exiting the “Forced Camera Power ON” Mode


1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: A, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

6-5
DCR-HC40/HC40E

[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT]

For tape path adjustment

CN001
6 7
Not used 4 5
1 CPC-15
3 3 (J-6082-564-A)
BATT 2
Adjustment remote
8 LANC jack commander (RM-95)
LANC
Not used
Not used *1 *1 1

CN002
1 RF MON
2 SWP
3 GND
4 XSC EEP
I/F unit for LANC control
5 EEP SCK
Not used. (J-6082-521-A)
6 EEP SO
7 EEP SI *1: Don’t connect any cable
to these connectors.

CPC lid
DC-IN connector

Screw (M1.7x4)
black

AC power
AC IN adaptor

Fig. 6-1-3.

6-6
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-1-3. Precaution
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments without loading cassette.

1. MODE switch (SS6300 block) ................... CAMERA-TAPE FOCUS .......................................................... MANUAL


2. NIGHT SHOT switch (Lens block) ................................. OFF COLOR SLOW SHUTTER ..................................... OFF
3. BACK LIGHT switch (CF6300 block) ............................ OFF DIGITAL ZOOM ..................................................... OFF
4. MENU settings (Touch panel) 16:9 WIDE ................................................................ OFF
CAMERA SET menu STEADY SHOT ....................................................... OFF
PROGRAM AE .................................................... AUTO PICT. APPLI menu
SPOT METER ...................................................... AUTO DIGITAL EFECT ..................................................... OFF
EXPOSURE ............................................................. OFF PICTURE EFECT .................................................... OFF
WHITE BALANCE ............................................. AUTO DEMO MODE ......................................................... OFF

2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.

Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame )


Electronic beam scanning frame
H
Yellow

Magenta
White
Cyan
Green

C C=D D
Red
Blue

Magenta
Yellow

Green
White
Cyan

Blue
Red
CRT picture frame

V
A B A=B B A
Fig. b (TV monitor picture)
Fig. a Enlargement
(Video output terminal
output waveform)
Difference in level

Adjust the camera zoom and direction to


obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a
B A and the TV monitor display shown in Fig. b.

Fig.6-1-4.
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-4. (Color reproduction
adjustment frame)
2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) White
Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a 841mm
clear chart in its place. Then adjust the zoom to TELE side
from WIDE side, and stop it when the black frame of the chart Black
disappears.
3) Flange back adjustment chart
Make the chart shown in Fig. 6-1-5 using A0 size (1189mm × 1189mm
841mm) black and white vellum paper.
Fig. 6-1-5.

Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of
the black and white paper joined together are not rough.

6-7
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-2. INITIALIZATION OF 8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, 18, 4. Program Version Check


19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E, 1F PAGE DATA Order Page Address Data Procedure
Note: When reading or writing the 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E or 1F page 1 5 FE Read the data, and this data is
data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 01, then select 4, 8, 9,
named DFE.
A, B, C, E or F page. The 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E or 1F page can
be chosen by this data setting. 2 5 FF Read the data, and this data is
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to named DFF.
“00”.
Note: DFE and DFF are the program version.
1-2-1. LOADING OF FLASH MEMORY PROGRAM
Read the program for the HI/DS controller (IC8401) from the 5. Loader Writing Inhibit Mode Setting
Memory Stick Duo, and write it to the flash memory (IC8503) of Setting method:
the HI/DS controller. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
1. Preparation 2 7 01 2F Set the data, and press PAUSE
1) Write the VERMEER. BIN file (program file for the HI/DS button.
controller) to a Memory Stick Duo using a personal computer. 3 7 02 FF Set the data, and press PAUSE
Note: Contact our service headquarter of each area how to get the button.
VERMEER. BIN file.
4 7 04 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2. Loader Writing Permission Mode Setting
Note: This setting is unnecessary when no program is loaded to the flash 5 7 05 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
memory, or when “Loader Writing Permission Mode” is set already. button.
(Refer to “6. Check of Loader Writing Inhibit Mode”.) 6 7 06 20 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Setting method:
7 7 00 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Order Page Address Data Procedure button.
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 8 7 02 Check that the data is “01”.
2 7 01 2F Set the data, and press PAUSE 9 0 01 00 Set the data.
button.
3 7 02 FF Set the data, and press PAUSE 6. Check of Loader Writing Inhibit Mode
button. Checking method:
4 7 04 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE Order Page Address Data Procedure
button. 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
5 7 05 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE 2 7 01 1F Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
6 7 06 FF Set the data, and press PAUSE 3 7 02 FF Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
7 7 00 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE 4 7 03 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. button.
8 7 02 Check that the data is “01”. 5 7 04 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3. Loading Method
1) Remove the power supply of the camcorder. 6 7 05 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
2) Inserts the Memory Stick Duo that memorizes the VERMEER.BIN button.
file to the memory stick slot. 7 7 00 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
3) Connect the adjustment remote commander with the HOLD button.
switch set to the “ADJ” side. 8 7 02 Check that the data is “01”.
4) Connect the power supply to the camcorder. 9 7 03 Check the data.
5) Check that the MS ACCESS LED is turned on for about 60 20: Loader writing inhibit mode
seconds. (The program is written in the flash memory in this FF: Loader writing permission mode
period.)
6) Check that the MS ACCESS LED is turned off. 10 0 01 00 Set the data.
7) Remove the Memory Stick Duo from the camcorder.
8) Turn off the power and turn on again.
9) Check that the camcorder is normal.
If normal, perform “4. Program Version Check” and “5. Loader
Writing Inhibit Mode Setting”.
If the MS ACCESS LED is blinked, repeat from step 1).

6-8
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF A, B, D, 1A, 1B PAGE DATA 2. Modification of A, B, D, 1A, 1B Page Data


Note: When reading or writing the A, B, D page data, select page: 0, If the A, B, D, 1A, 1B page data has been initialized, change the
address: 10, and set data: 00. data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by
When reading or writing the 1A or 1B page data, select page: 0, manual input.
address: 10, and set data: 01, then select A or B page. The 1A or 1B
page can be chosen by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to Modifying Method:
“00”. 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
1. Initializing the A, B, D, 1A, 1B Page Data 2) When changing the A, B, D page data, select page: 0, address:
Note1: If the A, B, D, 1A, 1B page data has been initialized, the following 10, and set data: 00.
adjustments need to be performed again. 3) When changing the 1A, 1B page data, select page: 0, address:
1) Modification of A, B, D, 1A, 1B page data 10, and set data: 01.
2) Touch panel adjustment After completing the modification of 1A, 1B page data, reset
the data of this address to “00”.
Adjusting page A 4) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
Adjusting Address 10 to FF they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
the data built in the same model.
Adjusting page B Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
Adjusting Address 00 to FF not operate.
Adjusting page D 5) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
Adjusting Address 10 to 70
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
Adjusting page 1A
Adjusting Address 00 to FF Processing after Completing Modification of A, B, D, 1A, 1B Page data
Adjusting page 1B Order Page Address Data Procedure
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 1 0 10 00 Set the data.
2 2 00 29 Set the data.
Initializing Method:
3 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Order Page Address Data Procedure button.
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Note: If the following symptoms occur after completing of the
2 0 10 00 Set the data.
“Modification of A, B, D, 1A, 1B page data”, check that the data of
3 7 04 Set the following data. addresses: 1A to 4F of A page and the data of addresses: 12 to 19 of
30 (DCR-HC40 (NTSC)) D page are same as those of the same model of the same destination.
31 (DCR-HC40E (PAL)) 1) The self-diagnosis code “E:20:00” on the LCD screen is displayed.
2) The power is shut off so that unit cannot operate.
4 7 01 XX Set the data. (Note2)
5 7 00 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
6 7 02 Check that the data changes to
“01”.
7 Perform “Modification of A, B,
D, 1A, 1B Page Data”.

Note2: XX=20: Initializing A page


XX=21: Initializing B page
XX=22: Initializing D page
XX=23: Initializing 1A page
XX=24: Initializing 1B page
XX=25: Initializing A and 1A page
XX=26: Initializing B and 1B page
XX=28: Initializing A, B, D, 1A and 1B page

6-9
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3. A Page Table 5. D Page Table


Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the A, B, Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the A, B,
D, 1A, 1B Page Data”.) D, 1A, 1B Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of A, B, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of A, B,
D, 1A, 1B Page Data”). D, 1A, 1B Page Data”).

Address Remark
Address Initial value Remark Initial value
NTSC PAL 00 to 0F
00 to 0F 10 to 13 Fixed data-1
10 00 00 Test mode 14 Fixed data-2
11 to 17 Fixed data-1 15 Fixed data-1
18 Fixed data-2 16 Fixed data-2
19 to 2E Fixed data-1 17 Fixed data-1
2F Fixed data-2 18 Fixed data-2
30 Fixed data-1 19 to 28 Fixed data-1
31 Fixed data-2 29 Fixed data-2
32 to 60 Fixed data-1 2A (Modified data. Copy the data
61 Fixed data-2 2B built in the same model.)
62 Fixed data-1 2C
63 Fixed data-2 2D
64 to 8F Fixed data-1 2E
90 E0 DD Touch panel adj. 2F
91 1D 1C 30
92 D4 C7 31 to 32 Fixed data-1
93 24 2A 33 Fixed data-2
94 to C9 Fixed data-1 34 to 47 Fixed data-1
CA Fixed data-2 48 Fixed data-2
CB to CF Fixed data-1 49 Fixed data-1
D0 Fixed data-2 4A Fixed data-2
D1 (Modified data. Copy the data 4B
D2 built in the same model.) 4C Fixed data-1
D3 to D4 Fixed data-1 4D Fixed data-2
D5 Fixed data-2 4E
D6 Fixed data-1 4F to 56 Fixed data-1
D7 Fixed data-2 57 Fixed data-2
D8 Fixed data-1 58 to 70 Fixed data-1
D9 Fixed data-2
Table. 6-1-4.
DA to FF Fixed data-1
6. 1A Page Table
Table. 6-1-2. Note1: When reading or writing the 1A page data, select page: 0, address:
10, and set data: 01, then select A page. The 1A page can be chosen
4. B Page Table by this data setting.
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to “00”.
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the A, B, Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the A, B,
D, 1A, 1B Page Data”.) D, 1A, 1B Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of A, B, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of A, B,
D, 1A, 1B Page Data”). D, 1A, 1B Page Data”).

Address Remark Address Remark


00 to FF Fixed data-1 00 to FF Fixed data-1

Table. 6-1-3. Table. 6-1-5.


7. 1B Page Table
Note1: When reading or writing the 1B page data, select page: 0, address:
10, and set data: 01, then select B page. The 1B page can be chosen
by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
“00”.
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the A, B,
D, 1A, 1B Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of A, B,
D, 1A, 1B Page Data”).
Address Remark
00 to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 6-1-6.
6-10
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-2-3. INITIALIZATION OF 8, C, 18, 1C PAGE DATA 2. Modification of 8, C, 18, 1C Page Data


Note: When reading or writing the 8, C page data, select page: 0, address: If the 8, C, 18, 1C page data has been initialized, change the data of
10, and set data: 00. the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual
When reading or writing the 18, 1C page data, select page: 0, address: input.
10, and set data: 01, then select 8 or C page. The 18 or 1C page can
be chosen by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to Modifying Method:
“00”. 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
1. Initializing the 8, C, 18, 1C Page Data 2) When changing the 8, C page data, select page: 0, address: 10,
Note1: If “Initializing the 8, C, 18, 1C Page Data” is performed, all data and set data: 00.
of the 8 page, C page, 18 page and 1C page will be initialized. (It 3) When changing the 18, 1C page data, select page: 0, address:
is impossible to initialize a single page.) 10, and set data: 01.
Note2: If the 8, C, 18, 1C page data has been initialized, following After completing the modification of 18, 1C page data, reset
adjustments need to be performed again. the data of this address to “00”.
1) Modification of 8, C, 18, 1C page data
4) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
2) Viewfinder system adjustments
3) LCD system adjustments they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
4) Serial No. input the data built in the same model.
5) Servo and RF system adjustments Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
6) Video system adjustments not operate.
5) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
Adjusting page 8
data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 6) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value.
Adjusting page C If not, change the data to the initial value.
Adjusting Address 10 to FF
Processing after Completing Modification of 8, C, 18, 1C Page data
Adjusting page 18
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Adjusting Address 00 to FF
1 0 10 00 Set the data.
Adjusting page 1C
2 2 00 29 Set the data.
Adjusting Address 00 to FF
3 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Initializing Method: button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 0 10 00 Set the data.
3 3 81 Check that the data is “00”.
4 3 80 0C Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5 3 80 Check that the data changes to
“1C”.
6 Perform “Modification of 8, C,
18, 1C Page Data”.

6-11
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3. 8 Page Table Address Remark


Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
E2 Fixed data-2
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the 8, C,
18, 1C Page Data”.) E3 (Modified data. Copy the data
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of 8, C, E4 built in the same model.)
18, 1C Page Data”).
E5
Address Remark E6
00 to 29 Fixed data-1 E7
2A Fixed data-2 E8 to EF Fixed data-1
2B to 3F Fixed data-1 F0 Fixed data-2
40 Fixed data-2 F1 to F9 Fixed data-1
41 to 43 Fixed data-1 FA Fixed data-2
44 Fixed data-2 FB
45 to 79 Fixed data-1 FC to FF Fixed data-1
7A Fixed data-2 Table. 6-1-6.
7B to 83 Fixed data-1
84 Fixed data-2
85 (Modified data. Copy the data
86 built in the same model.)
87
88
89
8A to 94 Fixed data-1
95 Fixed data-2
96 to AB Fixed data-1
AC Fixed data-2
B1 Fixed data-1
B2 Fixed data-2
B3 (Modified data. Copy the data
B4 built in the same model.)
B5 Fixed data-1
B6 Fixed data-2
B7 Fixed data-1
B8 Fixed data-2
B9 (Modified data. Copy the data
BA built in the same model.)
BB
BC to BD Fixed data-1
BE Fixed data-2
BF
C0 to C2 Fixed data-1
C3 Fixed data-2
C4 (Modified data. Copy the data
C5 built in the same model.)
C6
C7 Fixed data-1
C8 Fixed data-2
C9 (Modified data. Copy the data
CA built in the same model.)
CB
CC
CD
CE to D6 Fixed data-1
D7 Fixed data-2
D8 to DF Fixed data-1
E0 Fixed data-2
E1 Fixed data-1

6-12
DCR-HC40/HC40E

4. C Page Table
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Address Initial value Remark
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the 8, C,
18, 1C Page Data”.) NTSC PAL
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of 8, C, 69 to 6A Fixed data-1
18, 1C Page Data”). 6B Fixed data-2
6C to 74 Fixed data-1
Address Initial value Remark 75 Fixed data-2
NTSC PAL 76 to 78 Fixed data-1
00 to 0F 79 Fixed data-2
10 EE EE Switching position adj. 7A
11 00 00 7B 7B 7B Reflective mode white balance adj.
12 00 00 7C 6C 6C (LCD)
13 00 00 7D Fixed data-1
14 to 15 Fixed data-1 7E Fixed data-2
16 E0 E0 CAP FG duty adj. 7F to A3 Fixed data-1
17 to 24 Fixed data-1 A4 Fixed data-2
25 5D 5D S VIDEO out Y level adj. A5 to A8 Fixed data-1
26 7D 7D S VIDEO out Cr level adj. A9 Fixed data-2
27 59 59 S VIDEO out Cb level adj. AA (Modified data. Copy the data
28 to 3B Fixed data-1 AB built in the same model.)
3C Fixed data-2 AC
3D (Modified data. Copy the data AD to AF Fixed data-1
3E built in the same model.) B0 Fixed data-2
3F 6C 7A VCO adj. (EVF) B1 (Modified data. Copy the data
40 90 80 B2 built in the same model.)
41 Fixed data-1 B3
42 Fixed data-2 B4
43 Fixed data-1 B5
44 Fixed data-2 B6 to CB Fixed data-1
45 A0 A0 White balance adj. (EVF) CC Fixed data-2
46 88 88 CD (Modified data. Copy the data
47 29 29 Contrast adj. (EVF) CE built in the same model.)
48 Fixed data-2 CF
49 to 4B Fixed data-1 D0
4C Fixed data-2 D1
4D (Modified data. Copy the data D2
4E built in the same model.) D3
4F D4
50 6C 78 VCO adj. (LCD) D5 to D7 Fixed data-1
51 90 80 D8 Fixed data-2
52 BC BC V COM adj. (LCD) D9 (Modified data. Copy the data
53 to 54 Fixed data-1 DA built in the same model.)
55 Fixed data-2 DB
56 7D 7D Transmissive mode white balance DC to DE Fixed data-1
57 73 73 adj. (LCD) DF Fixed data-2
58 52 52 Contrast adj. (LCD) E0 08 08 Serial No. input
59 Fixed data-2 E1 00 00
5A to 5F Fixed data-1 E2 46 46
60 Fixed data-2 E3 01 01
61 Fixed data-1 E4 02 02
62 Fixed data-2 E5 00 00
63 E6 00 00
64 to 65 Fixed data-1 E7 00 00
66 Fixed data-2 E8 to F3 Fixed data-1
67 (Modified data. Copy the data
68 built in the same model.)

6-13
DCR-HC40/HC40E

C page
6. 1C Page Table
Note1: When reading or writing the 1C page data, select page: 0, address:
Address Initial value Remark
10, and set data: 01, then select C page. The 1C page can be chosen
NTSC PAL by this data setting.
F4 00 00 Emergency memory address After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
F5 00 00 (Mechanism section) “00”.
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the 8, C,
F6 00 00 18, 1C Page Data”.)
F7 00 00 Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of 8, C,
F8 00 00 18, 1C Page Data”).
F9 00 00
Address Remark
FA 00 00 Initial value
FB 00 00 00 to 77 Fixed data-1
FC 00 00 78 Fixed data-2
FD 00 00 79 to A9 Fixed data-1
FE 00 00 AA Fixed data-2
FF 00 00 AB to B2 Fixed data-1
B3 00 Error rate check
Table. 6-1-7.
B4 00
5. 18 Page Table B5 00
B6 00
Note1: When reading or writing the 18 page data, select page: 0, address: B7 00
10, and set data: 01, then select 8 page. The 18 page can be chosen
B8 80
by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to B9 00
“00”. BA 00
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the 8, C,
BB 00
18, 1C Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of 8, C, BC 00
18, 1C Page Data”). BD 00
Address Remark BE 00
00 Fixed data-1 BF 00
01 Fixed data-2 C0 00
02 to FF Fixed data-1 C1 00
Table. 6-1-8. C2 00
C3 80
C4 00
C5 00
C6 00
C7 00
C8 00
C9 to EF Fixed data-1
F0 Fixed data-2
F1 (Modified data. Copy the data
F2 built in the same model.)
F3
F4
F5 to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 6-1-9.

6-14
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-2-4. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F PAGE DATA 2. Modification of E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data
Note: When reading or writing the E, F page data, select page: 0, address: If the E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F page data has been initialized, change the
10, and set data: 00. data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by
When reading or writing the 14, 19, 1E and 1F page data, select manual input.
page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 01, then select 4, 9, E or F page.
The 14, 19, 1E or 1F page can be chosen by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
Modifying Method:
“00”. 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
1. Initializing the E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data 2) When changing the E, F page data, select page: 0, address: 10,
Note1: If “Initializing the E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data” is performed, and set data: 00.
all data of the E page, F page, 14 page, 19 page, 1E page and 1F 3) When changing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address: 10,
page will be initialized. (It is impossible to initialize a single page.) and set data: 01.
Note2: If the E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F page data has been initialized, following After completing the modification of 1F page data, reset the
adjustments need to be performed again. data of this address to “00”.
1) Modification of E, F, 14, 19, 1E, 1F page data
4) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because
2) Camera system adjustments
they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy
the data built in the same model.
Adjusting page E Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may
Adjusting Address 00 to FF not operate.
5) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the
Adjusting page F
adjustment remote commander each time when setting new
Adjusting Address 10 to FF data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
Adjusting page 14 6) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value.
Adjusting Address 00 to FF If not, change the data to the initial value.
Adjusting page 19
Processing after Completing Modification of E, F, 14, 19, 1E,
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 1F Page data
Adjusting page 1E Order Page Address Data Procedure
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 1 0 10 00 Set the data.
Adjusting page 1F 2 2 00 29 Set the data.
Adjusting Address 00 to FF 3 2 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Initializing Method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 0 10 00 Set the data.
3 6 01 Set the following data, and press
PAUSE button.
2D: DCR-HC40 (NTSC)
2F: DCR-HC40E (PAL)
4 6 03 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
“01”.
6 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
7 Perform “Modification of E, F,
14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”.

6-15
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3. E Page Table Address Remark


Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
4F Fixed data-2
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”.) 50 (Modified data. Copy the data
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 51 built in the same model.)
14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”).
52
Address Remark 53 Fixed data-1
00 to 04 Fixed data-1 54 Fixed data-2
05 Fixed data-2 55
06 to 07 Fixed data-1 56 to 60 Fixed data-1
08 Fixed data-2 61 Fixed data-2
09 (Modified data. Copy the data 62 (Modified data. Copy the data
0A built in the same model.) 63 built in the same model.)
0B 64 to 65 Fixed data-1
0C 66 Fixed data-2
0D 67 (Modified data. Copy the data
0E 68 built in the same model.)
0F Fixed data-1 69
10 Fixed data-2 6A to 71 Fixed data-1
11 to 12 Fixed data-1 72 Fixed data-2
13 Fixed data-2 73
14 to 1A Fixed data-1 74 to 86 Fixed data-1
1B Fixed data-2 87 Fixed data-2
1C Fixed data-1 88 to FD Fixed data-1
1D Fixed data-2 FE Fixed data-2
1E Fixed data-1 FF Fixed data-1
1F Fixed data-2
Table. 6-1-10.
20 (Modified data. Copy the data
21 built in the same model.)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28 to 37 Fixed data-1
38 Fixed data-2
39
3A Fixed data-1
3C Fixed data-2
3D (Modified data. Copy the data
3E built in the same model.)
3F
40
41
42 to 43 Fixed data-1
44 Fixed data-2
45 (Modified data. Copy the data
46 built in the same model.)
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E

6-16
DCR-HC40/HC40E

4. F Page Table
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Address Initial value Remark
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”.) NTSC PAL
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, 53 19 19 Flange back adj.
14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”). 54 00 00
55 52 52
Address Initial value Remark 56 00 00
NTSC PAL 57 00 00
00 to 0F 58 00 00
10 to 12 Fixed data-1 59 Fixed data-1
13 28 28 HALL adj. 5A 80 80 MR adj.
14 70 70 5B 80 80
15 88 88 5C 80 80
16 40 40 5D 80 80
17 80 80 5E 40 40
18 88 88 5F C0 C0
19 A0 A0 MAX GAIN adj. 60 40 40
1A 00 00 LV standard data input 61 C0 C0
1B 30 30 62 40 40
1C to 23 Fixed data-1 63 C0 C0
24 00 00 HALL adj. 64 40 40
25 00 00 65 C0 C0
26 00 00 66 to 71 Fixed data-1
27 00 00 72 Fixed data-2
28 to 2D Fixed data-1 73
2E 25 25 AWB standard data input 74 to 75 Fixed data-1
2F 00 00 76 40 40 Mechanical shutter adj.
30 07 07 77 00 00
31 00 00 78 34 34
32 15 15 Auto white balance adj. 79 00 00
33 00 00 7A 30 30
34 0C 0C 7B 00 00
35 00 00 7C 2A 2A
36 Fixed data-1 7D 00 00
37 45 48 Color reproduction adj. 7E 10 10
38 Fixed data-1 7F 00 00
39 2C 2E Color reproduction adj. 80 40 40
3A to 3F Fixed data-1 81 3A 3A
40 FF FE Color reproduction adj. 82 31 31
41 E7 E1 83 31 31
42 to 43 Fixed data-1 84 35 35
44 2C 2C Auto white balance adj. 85 1E 1E
45 C0 C0 86 80 80
46 5B 5B 87 80 80
47 80 80 88 80 80
48 2E 2E Flange back adj. 89 80 80
49 F8 F8 8A 80 80
4A 37 37 8B 80 80
4B 46 46 8C to 91 Fixed data-1
4C 1C 1C 92 19 19 HALL adj.
4D 54 54 93 to 9E Fixed data-1
4E 00 00 9F Fixed data-2
4F 00 00 A0
50 00 00 A1 to B0 Fixed data-1
51 00 00 B1 Fixed data-2
52 93 93 B2 to F7 Fixed data-1

6-17
DCR-HC40/HC40E

F page
5. 14 Page Table
Note1: When reading or writing the 14 page data, select page: 0, address:
Address Initial value Remark
10, and set data: 01, then select 4 page. The 14 page can be chosen
NTSC PAL by this data setting.
F8 Fixed data-2 After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
F9 (Modified data. Copy the data “00”.
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
FA built in the same model.) 14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”.)
FB Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F,
FC to FF Fixed data-1 14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”).

Table. 6-1-11.
Address Remark
Initial value
00 to 35 Fixed data-1
36 Fixed data-2
37 to 95 Fixed data-1
96 Fixed data-2
97 to E7 Fixed data-1
E8 25 AWB standard data input
E9 00
EA 07
EB 00
EC 25
ED 00
EE 07
EF 00
F0 25
F1 00
F2 07
F3 00
F4 15 Auto white balance adj.
F5 00
F6 0C
F7 00
F8 15
F9 00
FA 0C
FB 00
FC 15
FD 00
FE 0C
FF 00
Table. 6-1-12.

6-18
DCR-HC40/HC40E

6. 19 Page Table 7. 1E Page Table


Note1: When reading or writing the 19 page data, select page: 0, address: Note1: When reading or writing the 1E page data, select page: 0, address:
10, and set data: 01, then select 9 page. The 19 page can be chosen 10, and set data: 01, then select E page. The 1E page can be chosen
by this data setting. by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
“00”. “00”.
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F, Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”.) 14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F, Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F,
14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”). 14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”).

Address Remark
Address Remark
Initial value 00 to 17 Fixed data-1
00 to 15 Fixed data-1 18 Fixed data-2
16 Fixed data-2 19 (Modified data. Copy the data
17 (Modified data. Copy the data 1A built in the same model.)
18 built in the same model.) 1B
19 1C
1A 1D
1B 1E
1C to 23 Fixed data-1 1F
24 28 HALL adj. 20 to AB Fixed data-1
25 D8 AC Fixed data-2
26 28 AD to C4 Fixed data-1
27 D8 C5 Fixed data-2
28 to 53 Fixed data-1 C6 Fixed data-1
54 Fixed data-2 C7 Fixed data-2
55 (Modified data. Copy the data C8 Fixed data-1
56 built in the same model.) C9 Fixed data-2
57 CA to CB Fixed data-1
58 CC Fixed data-2
59 CD to D1 Fixed data-1
5A D2 Fixed data-2
5B D3 (Modified data. Copy the data
5C D4 built in the same model.)
5D D5
5E D6 to D7 Fixed data-1
5F D8 Fixed data-2
60 D9 (Modified data. Copy the data
61 DA built in the same model.)
62 DB
63 DC
64 to 65 Fixed data-1 DD to FF Fixed data-1
66 Fixed data-2 Table. 6-1-14.
67 (Modified data. Copy the data
68 built in the same model.)
69
6A
6B
6C to 86 Fixed data-1
87 00 Emergency memory address
88 00 (Camera section)
89 00
8A 00
8C to A6 Fixed data-1
A7 Fixed data-2
A8
A9 to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 6-1-13.

6-19
DCR-HC40/HC40E

8. 1F Page Table
Note1: When reading or writing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address:
10, and set data: 01, then select F page. The 1F page can be chosen
by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
“00”.
Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing the E, F,
14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”.)
Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of E, F,
14, 19, 1E, 1F Page Data”).
Address Remark
00 to 44 Fixed data-1
45 Fixed data-2
46 (Modified data. Copy the data
47 built in the same model.)
48 to 6F Fixed data-1
70 Fixed data-2
71 (Modified data. Copy the data
72 built in the same model.)
73 to B0 Fixed data-1
B1 Fixed data-2
B2 to C9 Fixed data-1
CA Fixed data-2
CB to F3 Fixed data-1
F4 Fixed data-2
F5 to FF Fixed data-1
Table. 6-1-15.

6-20
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS


Before perform the camera system adjustments (except for “54MHz
(HC40E)/66MHz (HC40) Origin Oscillation Check”), check that
the specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are
satisfied.
And check that the data of page: 0, address: 10 is “00”. If not, set
data: 00 to this address.

1. 54MHz (HC40E)/66MHz (HC40) Origin Oscillation


Check (VC-352 board)
Set the frequency of the clock for synchronization.
If deviated, the synchronization will be disrupted and the color will
become inconsistent.
Subject Not required
Measurement Point Pin qh of IC5003 (ADCCLK)
Measuring Instrument Frequency counter
Specified Value f=33000000 ± 664Hz (NTSC)
f=27000000 ± 542Hz (PAL)

Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.


Note2: NTSC model : DCR-HC40
PAL model : DCR-HC40E

Switch setting:
MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE

Adjusting method:
Check that the frequency (f) satisfies the specified value.

36 25
37 24
IC5003
48 13
1 12

VC-352 board

Fig. 6-1-6.

6-21
DCR-HC40/HC40E

2. HALL Adjustment Checking method:


For detecting the position of the lens iris and ND filter, adjust AMP Order Page Address Data Procedure
gain and offset.
1 0 03 03 Set the data.
Subject Not required
2 0 10 00 Set the data.
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1)
3 6 01 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander button.
Adjustment Page F 19 (Note2) 4 6 01 03 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Adjustment Address 13 to 18, 92 24 to 27 button.
Specified Value 1 D4 to DC 5 1 Check that the IRIS display data
Specified Value 2 24 to 2C (Note1) satisfies the specified
value 1.
Specified Value 3 D2 to DE
6 6 01 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Specified Value 4 22 to 2E
button.
Note1: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 7 1 Check that the IRIS display data
1 : XX : XX (Note1) satisfies the specified
IRIS display data value.2.
ND display data
8 6 01 6B Set the data, and press PAUSE
Note2: When reading or writing the 19 page data, select page: 0, address:
10, and set data: 01, then select 9 page. The 19 page can be chosen button.
by this data setting. 9 6 01 69 Set the data, and press PAUSE
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to button.
“00”.
10 1 Check that the ND display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
Switch setting:
value 3.
MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE
11 6 01 6B Set the data, and press PAUSE
Adjusting method: button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 12 1 Check that the ND display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
value.4.
2 0 10 00 Set the data.
3 6 01 6D Set the data, and press PAUSE Processing after Completing Adjustments:
button. Order Page Address Data Procedure
4 6 02 Check that the data changes to 1 0 03 00 Set the data.
“01” within 50 sec. (Note3)
2 0 10 00 Set the data.
5 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
3 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
button.
Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 4 0 01 00 Set the data.
13 to 18, 92 and to page: 19, address: 24 to 27.

6-22
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3. MR Adjustment
The MR (Magnet resistor) adjustment of the inner focus lens is
carried out automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be
deviated during auto focusing/manual focusing.
Subject Not required
Measurement Point Adjustment remote commander
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 58, 5A to 65
Specified Value1 40 to C0
Specified Value2 03 to 78
Specified Value3 88 to FD

Note1: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment.


Note2: Perform this adjustment before “Flange Back Adjustment”.
Note3: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.

Switch setting:
1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE

Adjusting method: Processing after Completing Adjustments:


Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
2 6 01 BD Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button. 2 0 01 00 Set the data.
3 6 02 Check that the data changes to 3 Turn off the power and turn on
“01”. (Note5) again
4 F 5A Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 1.
5 F 5B Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 1.
6 F 5C Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 1.
7 F 5D Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 1.
8 F 5E Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 2.
9 F 5F Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 3.
10 F 60 Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 2.
11 F 61 Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 3.
12 F 62 Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 2.
13 F 63 Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 3.
14 F 64 Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 2.
15 F 65 Check that the data satisfies the
specified value 3.

Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:


58, 5A to 65.

6-23
DCR-HC40/HC40E

4. Flange Back Adjustment Adjusting method:


(Using Minipattern Box) Order Page Address Data Procedure
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during
auto focusing/manual focusing. 2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for
the minipattern box (Note1) 3 Wait for 1 sec.
Measurement Point Adjustment remote commander 4 6 01 27 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Measuring Instrument
5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
Adjustment Page F
“01”. (Note6)
Adjustment Address 48 to 58
6 F 57 Check that the data is “00” to
Specified Value Data of page: F, address: 57 is “00” to “0B”. “0B”.
Data of page: 6, address: 0C is “00”.
7 6 0C Check that the data is “00”.
Note1: Dark Siemens star chart.
Note6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
Note2: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of the
48 to 58.
following adjustments.
“HALL Adjustment”, “MR Adjustment”
Note3: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Note4: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Note5: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Switch setting: 2 6 01 25 Set the data, and press PAUSE
1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE button.
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
3) COLOR SLOW SHUTTER (CAMERA SET menu) ...... OFF button.
4 0 01 00 Set the data.
Preparations: 5 Perform “Flange Back Check”.
1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following
figure.
Note: The attachment lenses are not used.
2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and
the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm.
3) Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal.
4) Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is
the specified voltage.
5) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end,
the center of the Siemens star chart and center of the exposure
screen coincide.

Specified voltage:
The specified voltage varies according to the minipattern box, so
adjust the power supply output voltage to the specified voltage
written on the sheet which is supplied with the minipattern box.
Below 3 cm

Minipattern box

Camcorder

Camera
table

Regulated power supply


Output voltage : Specified voltage ±0.01Vdc
Output current : more than 3.5A

Red (+)
Black (–)

Yellow (SENS +)

White (SENS –) Need not connected


Black (GND)
Fig. 6-1-7.

6-24
DCR-HC40/HC40E

5. Flange Back Adjustment 5-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2)


(Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjustment (1)”.
More Than 500m Away) Subject Subject more than 500m away
The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out (Subjects with clear contrast such as
automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during buildings, etc.)
auto focusing/manual focusing.
Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor
5-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) Measuring Instrument
Subject Flange back adjustment chart Adjustment Page F
(2.0 m from the front of the protection Adjustment Address 48 to 58
glass) (Luminance: 350 ± 50 lux)
Measurement Point Adjustment remote commander Note1: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment.
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Measuring Instrument Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
Adjustment Page F 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Adjustment Address 48 to 58
Switch setting:
Specified Value Data of page: F, address: 57 is “00” to “0B”. 1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE
Data of page: 6, address: 0C is “00”. 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) COLOR SLOW SHUTTER (CAMERA SET menu) ...... OFF
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of the
following adjustments.
“HALL Adjustment”, “MR Adjustment”
Preparations:
Note2: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment. 1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is
Note3: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as
Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page: building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. not be in the screen.)

Switch setting: Adjusting method:


1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE Order Page Address Data Procedure
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
3) COLOR SLOW SHUTTER (CAMERA SET menu) ...... OFF
2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Preparations: button. (Note2)
1) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end, 3 Wait for 1 sec.
the center of the chart for the flange back adjustment and center 4 Place a ND filter on the lens so
of the exposure screen coincide. that the optimum image is obtain.

Adjusting method: 5 6 01 29 Set the data, and press PAUSE


button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure
6 6 02 Check that the data changes to
1 0 01 01 Set the data. “01”. (Note4)
2 6 01 13 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. (Note2) Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
3 Wait for 1 sec. 11, 48 to 58.

4 6 01 15 Set the data, and press PAUSE Processing after Completing Adjustments:
button.
Order Page Address Data Procedure
5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
“01”. (Note5) 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
6 F 57 Check the data is “00” to “0B”.
2 6 01 25 Set the data, and press PAUSE
7 6 0C Check that the data is “00”. button.
Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 3 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
48 to 58. button.
4 0 01 00 Set the data.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
5 Perform “Flange Back Check”
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
2 6 01 25 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 0 01 00 Set the data.
5 Perform “Flange Back
Adjustment (2)”

6-25
DCR-HC40/HC40E

6. Flange Back Check 7. MAX GAIN Adjustment


Subject Siemens star Setting the minimum illumination.
(2.0m from the front of the lens) If it is not consistent, the image level required for taking subjects in
(Luminance : approx. 200 lux) low illuminance will not be produced (dark).
Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor Subject Clear chart
(1.0 m from the front of the lens)
Measuring Instrument
(Note1)
Specified Value Focused at the TELE end and WIDE end.
Adjustment Page F
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. Adjustment Address 19

Switch setting: Note1: Shoot the clear chart with the zoom WIDE end. And adjust the
direction of the camera so that the chart is located in the center of
1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE
the screen.
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Note3: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Flange
Note2: When the auto focus is ON, the lens can be checked if it is focused Back Adjustment”.
or not by observing the data on the page 1 of the adjustment remote Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
commander. 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
1) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 0F. Note5: NTSC model : DCR-HC40
2) Page 1 shows the state of the focus. PAL model : DCR-HC40E
1 : 00 : XX
Odd: Focused
Switch setting:
Even: Unfocused
1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
Checking method:
3) ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
1) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 01.
4) FOCUS (CAMERA SET menu) ........................... MANUAL
2) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 01.
5) DIGITAL ZOOM (CAMERA SET menu) ...................... OFF
3) Place the Siemens star 2.0m from the front of the lens.
6) STEADY SHOT (CAMERA SET menu) ........................ OFF
4) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the
Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image.
Adjusting method:
5) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.
6) Turn on the auto focus. Order Page Address Data Procedure
7) Check that the lens is focused (Note2). 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
8) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 10. 2 6 96 Set the following data.
9) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end. 1F (NTSC), 22 (PAL)
10) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused.
3 6 97 00 Set the data.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: 4 6 01 6F Set the data, and press PAUSE
1) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 00. button.
2) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 00. 5 6 02 Check that the data changes to
3) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 00. “01” within 30 sec. (Note6)
4) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 00.
Note6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
19.

Processing after Completing Adjustments


Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 96 00 Set the data.
2 6 97 00 Set the data.
3 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 0 01 00 Set the data.

6-26
DCR-HC40/HC40E

8. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment


Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 76 to 8B

Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.


Note2: NTSC model : DCR-HC40
PAL model : DCR-HC40E

Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Input the following data to page: F, addresses: 76 to 8B.
Note: Press the PAUSE button each time to set the data.

Data
Address
NTSC PAL
76 4B 4B
77 00 00
78 36 36
79 00 00
7A 2B 2B
7B 00 00
7C 22 22
7D 00 00
7E 1B 1B
7F 00 00
80 58 58
81 64 64
82 64 64
83 5D 5D
84 55 55
85 22 22
86 80 80
87 80 80
88 80 80
89 80 80
8A 80 80
8B 7F 7F

3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

6-27
DCR-HC40/HC40E

9. Picture Frame Setting


(Color Reproduction Adjustment Frame)
Subject Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame)
(1.0m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F

Note1: The following adjustments should be carried out upon completion


of “Flange back adjustment”.
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. Check on the oscilloscope

Switch setting: 1. Horizontal period


1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE
A=B C=D
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) FOCUS (CAMERA SET menu) ........................... MANUAL B C
4) DIGITAL ZOOM (CAMERA SET menu) ...................... OFF
A D
5) STEADY SHOT (CAMERA SET menu) ........................ OFF

Setting method:
1) Adjust the zoom and the camera direction, and set to the
specified position.
2) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display,
and adjust the picture frame to this position in following
adjustments using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”.

Fig. 6-1-8.

2. Vertical period

E E=F F

Fig. 6-1-9.

Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)

Color bar chart picture frame Monitor TV picture frame

Fig. 6-1-10.

6-28
DCR-HC40/HC40E

10. Color Reproduction Adjustment


Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color
reproduction is produced.
Subject Color bar chart
(Color reproduction adjustment frame) For NTSC model
(1.0m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope
Adjustment Page F
Adjustment Address 37, 39, 40, 41
Specified Value All color luminance points should settle
within each color reproduction frame.

Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.


Note2: NTSC model : DCR-HC40
PAL model : DCR-HC40E

Switch setting: Burst position


1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) FOCUS (CAMERA SET menu) ........................... MANUAL
4) DIGITAL ZOOM (CAMERA SET menu) ...................... OFF
5) STEADY SHOT (CAMERA SET menu) ........................ OFF
For PAL model
Adjusting method:
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. Burst position
2) Select page: 6, address: 9D, and set data: 20.
3) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3D, and press the PAUSE
button.
4) Select page: F, address: F0, set the following data, and press
the PAUSE button.
37 (NTSC), B7 (PAL)
5) Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope, and adjust
the burst luminance point to the burst position of the color
reproduction frame.
6) Change the data of page: F, address: 37, 39, 40 and 41, and
settle each color luminance point in each color reproduction
frame.
Note: Be sure to press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander before changing the addresses. If not, the new data
will not be written to the memory.

Processing after Completing Adjustments: Fig. 6-1-11.


1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
button.
2) Select page: 6, address: 9D, and set data: 00.
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

6-29
DCR-HC40/HC40E

11. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame) 12. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input
When performing “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input”, “LV Adjust the white balance reference at 3200K.
Standard Data Input”, “Auto White Balance Adjustment” and “White Subject Clear chart (All white frame) (Note2)
Balance Check”, set the picture frame to “All white frame”.
Adjustment Page F 14 (Note3)
Subject Clear chart (All white frame)
Adjustment Address 2E to 31 E8 to F3
(1.0m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Color
Measuring Instrument TV monitor (Under scan mode) reproduction adjustment”.
Note2: Perform “11. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame)” before
Specified Value Whole of the screen is white this adjustment.
Note3: When reading or writing the 14 page data, select page: 0, address:
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. 10, and set data: 01, then select 4 page. The 14 page can be chosen
Note2: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. by this data setting.
1 : XX : XX After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
XL or YL data “00”.
XH or YH data Note4: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only
once.
Switch setting: Note5: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) FOCUS (CAMERA SET menu) ........................... MANUAL Switch setting:
4) DIGITAL ZOOM (CAMERA SET menu) ...................... OFF 1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE
5) STEADY SHOT (CAMERA SET menu) ........................ OFF 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) FOCUS (CAMERA SET menu) ........................... MANUAL
Setting method: 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (CAMERA SET menu) ...................... OFF
Order Page Address Data Procedure 5) STEADY SHOT (CAMERA SET menu) ........................ OFF
1 While observing the TV monitor Adjusting method:
screen, adjust the zoom to TELE
side from WIDE side, and stop it Order Page Address Data Procedure
when the black frame of the chart 1 Check that the whole of the screen
disappears. is white. If not, perform “11.
2 Check that whole of the screen is Picture Frame Setting (All White
white. Frame)”.
3 0 03 18 Set the data. 2 0 01 01 Set the data.
4 1 Read the XH and XL data. (Note2) 3 0 10 00 Set the data.
5 0 03 22 Set the data. 4 Wait for more than 2 sec.
6 1 Read the YH and YL data. (Note2) 5 6 01 43 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
7 0 03 00 Set the data.
6 6 01 41 Set the data, and press PAUSE
8 Perform the following adjustments. button.
How to reset the zoom and focus when they deviated: 7 6 02 Check that the data changes to
If the zoom and focus deviated due to some reason reset them in the “01”. (Note6)
following method.
Note6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
Order Page Address Data Procedure 2E to 31 and to page: 14, address: E8 to F3.
1 6 90 XL Set the data.
Processing after Completing Adjustments
2 6 91 XH Set the data.
Order Page Address Data Procedure
3 6 92 YL Set the data.
1 0 10 00 Set the data.
4 6 93 YH Set the data.
2 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
5 6 01 79 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
button.
3 0 01 00 Set the data.
Processing after Completing Adjustments 4 Perform “LV Standard Data
After completing “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input”, “LV Input”.
Standard Data Input”, “Auto White Balance Adjustment” and “White
Balance Check”, release the data setting.
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 6 90 00 Set the data.
2 6 91 00 Set the data.
3 6 92 00 Set the data.
4 6 93 00 Set the data.

6-30
DCR-HC40/HC40E

13. LV Standard Data Input 14. Auto White Balance Adjustment


Adjust the normal coefficient of the light value. Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data.
Subject Clear chart (All white frame) (Note2) If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will
be poor.
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note4)
Subject Clear chart (All white frame) (Note2)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature
Adjustment Page F
correction
Adjustment Address 1A, 1B
Adjustment Page F 14 (Note3)
Specified Value 0FE0 to 1020
Adjustment Address 32 to 35, 44 to 47 F4 to FF
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Auto
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of “Auto
White Balance Standard Data Input”.
White Balance Standard Data Input”.
Note2: Perform “11. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame)” before
Note2: Perform “11. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame)” before
this adjustment.
this adjustment.
Note3: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Note3: When reading or writing the 14 page data, select page: 0, address:
Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, to page:
10, and set data: 01, then select 4 page. The 14 page can be chosen
6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
by this data setting.
Note5: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
1 : XX : XX
“00”.
Display data

Switch setting: Switch setting:


1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE 1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF
3) FOCUS (CAMERA SET menu) ........................... MANUAL 3) FOCUS (CAMERA SET menu) ........................... MANUAL
4) DIGITAL ZOOM (CAMERA SET menu) ...................... OFF 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (CAMERA SET menu) ...................... OFF
5) STEADY SHOT (CAMERA SET menu) ........................ OFF 5) STEADY SHOT (CAMERA SET menu) ........................ OFF

Adjusting method: Adjusting method:


Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 Check that the whole of the screen 1 Check that the whole of the screen
is white. If not, perform “11. is white. If not, perform “11.
Picture Frame Setting (All White Picture Frame Setting (All White
Frame)”. Frame)”.
2 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 Place the C14 filter for color
temperature correction on the lens.
3 Wait for more than 6 sec.
3 0 01 01 Set the data.
4 6 01 0D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. 4 0 10 00 Set the data.
5 6 02 Check that the data changes to 5 F 44 2C Set the data, and press PAUSE
“01” within 20 sec. (Note6) button.
6 0 03 1E Set the data. 6 F 45 C0 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
7 1 Check that the display data
(Note5) satisfies the specified 7 F 46 5B Set the data, and press PAUSE
value. button.
8 F 47 80 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Note6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: button.
1A, 1B. 9 6 01 47 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
Processing after Completing Adjustments
10 6 01 45 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Order Page Address Data Procedure button.
1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE 11 6 02 Check that the data changes to
button. “01”. (Note4)
2 0 03 00 Set the data.
3 0 01 00 Set the data. Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address:
32 to 35 and to page: 14, address: F4 to FF.
4 Perform “Auto White Balance
Adjustment”. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 10 00 Set the data.
2 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 0 01 00 Set the data.
4 Perform “White Balance Check”.

6-31
DCR-HC40/HC40E

15. White Balance Check Checking method:


Subject Clear chart (All white frame) Order Page Address Data Procedure
(1.0m from the front of the lens) 1 Check that the picture frame is
(Note3) “All white frame”. If not, perform
Filter Filter C14 for color temperature “11. Picture Frame Setting (All
correction White Frame)”.
ND filter 1.0 and 0.4 and 0.1 Outdoor white balance check
Measurement Point Video terminal of Display data 2 Place the C14 filter on the lens.
AUDIO/VIDEO of page 1
3 6 01 3F Set the data, and press PAUSE
jack (Note4)
button.
Measuring Instrument Vectorscope Adjustment
4 0 03 04 Set the data.
remote commander
5 1 Check that the display data
Specified Value 1 Fig. 6-1-12. A to B
(Note4) satisfies the R ratio
Specified Value 2 R ratio: 2C60 to 2D20 specified value.
B ratio: 5B20 to 5BE0
6 0 03 05 Set the data.
Specified Value 3 8000 to 8BC0
7 1 Check that the display data
(Note4) satisfies the B ratio
Note1: Perform “Auto White Balance Adjustment” before this adjustment.
If not performed, R ratio data and B ratio data may not satisfy the specified value.
specified value 2. 8 Check that the center of the white
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. luminance point is within the
Note3: Perform “11. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame)”. circle shown Fig. 6-1-12. A.
Note4: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.
1 : XX : XX 9 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Display data button.
10 Remove the C14 filter.
Switch setting: Indoor white balance check
1) MODE ......................................................... CAMERA-TAPE
2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 11 6 01 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE
3) FOCUS (CAMERA SET menu) ........................... MANUAL button.
4) DIGITAL ZOOM (CAMERA SET menu) ...................... OFF 12 Check that the center of the white
5) STEADY SHOT (CAMERA SET menu) ........................ OFF luminance point is within the
circle shown Fig. 6-1-12. B.
13 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
LV data check
14 Place the ND filter 1.5
R-Y (1.0+0.1+0.4) on the lens.
1mm
15 0 03 06 Set the data.
16 1 Check that the display data
B-Y (Note2) satisfies the specified
3mm value 3.

3mm Processing after Completing Adjustments


Order Page Address Data Procedure
Fig. 6-1-12 (A). 1 0 03 00 Set the data.
2 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
R-Y 2mm 3 6 90 00 Set the data.
4 6 91 00 Set the data.
5 6 92 00 Set the data.
B-Y 6 6 93 00 Set the data.
7 Remove the ND filter.
2mm

Fig. 6-1-12 (B).

6-32
DCR-HC40/HC40E

16. Steady Shot Check


Precautions on the Parts Replacement
There are two types of repair parts.
Type A : ENC03MA
Type B : ENC03MB
Replace the broken sensor with a same type sensor. If replace with
other type parts, the image will vibrate up and down or left and
right during hand-shake correction operations.

Precautions on Angular Velocity Sensor


The sensor incorporates a precision oscillator. Handle it with care
as if it dropped, the balance of the oscillator will be disrupted and
operations will not be performed properly.
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Display data of page 1 (Note1)
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
Specified Value 2680 to 5080

Note1: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander.


1 : XX : XX
Display data
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Switch setting:
1) STEADY SHOT (CAMERA SET menu) ......................... ON
2) ZOOM .................................................................... TELE end

Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Pitch sensor check
(SE-141 board SE401)
1 0 03 11 Set the data.
2 1 Check that the display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value. (Note3)
Yaw sensor check
(SE-141 board SE402)
3 0 03 12 Set the data.
4 1 Check that the display data
(Note1) satisfies the specified
value. (Note3)
5 0 03 00 Set the data.
6 Move the camcorder, and check
that the steady shot operations
have been performed normally

Note3: Don’t move the camcorder.

6-33
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-4. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM 1. EVF Automatic Adjustment (VC-352 board)
ADJUSTMENT This adjustment does the following adjustment items automatically.
VCO adjustment
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages Contrast adjustment
caused by static electricity. Mode CAMERA-TAPE
Note2: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0,
address: 10 is “00”. If not, set data: 00 to this address. Subject Arbitrary
Note3: As the PANEL OPEN switch is attached to the cabinet (R), this Adjustment Page C
cabinet must be attached when performing adjustments.
Adjustment Address 3F, 40 (VCO adj.)
If you perform the adjustments with cabinet (R) removed, set the
following data. 47 (Contrast adj.)
1) Select page: 3, address: C4, and set data: 67.
2) Select page: 3, address: C5, and set data: 01. Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Reset the data after completing adjustment.
1) Select page: 3, address: C4, and set data: 00. Adjusting method:
2) Select page: 3, address: C5, and set data: 00. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Note4: NTSC model : DCR-HC40
PAL model : DCR-HC40E 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 C 71 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Switch setting: button.
LCD panel ........................................................................... Closed 3 3 01 5A Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 3 02 Check that the data changes to
“00”.
5 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note2)
6 C 3F Read the data, and this data is
named D3F.
7 Convert D3F to decimal notation,
and obtain D3F’. (Note3)
8 Calculate D40’ using following
equations (Decimal calculation)
[NTSC model]
When D3F’ 245
D40’ = D3F’+10
When D3F’ > 245
D40’ = 255
[PAL model]
When D3F’ 10
D40’ = D3F’– 10
When D3F’ < 10
D40’ = 0
9 Convert D40’ to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain D40. (Note3)
10 C 40 D40 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
11 C 71 41 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
12 0 01 00 Set the data.

Note2: If the data is “01”, adjustment has errors. Contents of the error is
written into page: 3, addresses: C6. See the following table.
Data of page: 3,
Contents of error
address: C6
5E VCO adjustment error
61 Contrast adjustment error

Note3: Refer to “Table 6-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.

6-34
DCR-HC40/HC40E

2. White Balance Adjustment (VC-352 board)


Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the reproduction of the EVF screen may degenerate.
Mode CAMERA-TAPE
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Check on EVF screen
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address 45, 46
Specified Value The EVF screen should not be colored.

Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC9301
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 C 45 A0 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 C 46 88 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 C 46 Check that the EVF screen is not
colored. If not colored, proceed to
step 10.
5 C 45 Change the data so that the EVF
screen is not colored.
6 C 45 Press PAUSE button.
7 C 46 Change the data so that the EVF
screen is not colored.
8 C 46 Press PAUSE button.
9 C 46 If the EVF screen is colored,
repeat steps 5 to 9.
10 0 01 00 Set the data.

6-35
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 1. LCD Automatic Adjustment (PD-213 board)


This adjustment does the following adjustment items automatically.
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages VCO adjustment
caused by static electricity. Contrast adjustment
Note2: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0,
Mode CAMERA-TAPE
address: 10 is “00”. If not, set data: 00 to this address.
Note3: NTSC model : DCR-HC40 Subject Arbitrary
PAL model : DCR-HC40E Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address 50, 51 (VCO adj.)
Switch setting:
58 (Contrast adj.)
LCD panel ............................................................................. Open

Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 C 70 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 3 01 5A Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 3 02 Check that the data changes to
“00”.
5 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note2)
6 C 50 Read the data, and this data is
named D50.
7 Convert D50 to decimal notation,
and obtain D50’. (Note3)
8 Calculate D51’ using following
equations (Decimal calculation)
[NTSC model]
When D50’ 245
D51’ = D50’ + 10
When D50’ > 245
D51’ = 255
[PAL model]
When D50’ 10
D51’ = D50’ – 10
When D50’ < 10
D51’ = 0
9 Convert D51’ to a hexadecimal
number, and obtain D51. (Note3)
10 C 51 D51 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
11 C 70 41 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
12 0 01 00 Set the data.

Note2: If the data is “01”, adjustment has errors. Contents of the error is
written into page: 3, addresses: C6. See the following table.
Data of page: 3,
Contents of error
address: C6
58 VCO adjustment error
60 Contrast adjustment error

Note3: Refer to “Table 6-4-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table”.

6-36
DCR-HC40/HC40E

2. V COM Adjustment (PD-213 board) 3. Transmissive Mode White Balance Adjustment


Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the (PD-213 board)
specified value. Correct the white balance of the transmissive mode.
If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and If deviated, the reproduction of the LCD screen may degenerate.
conspicuous vertical lines. Mode CAMERA-TAPE
Mode CAMERA-TAPE Subject Arbitrary
Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Check on LCD screen
Measurement Point Check on LCD display Measuring Instrument
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Page C Adjustment Address 56, 57
Adjustment Address 52 Specified Value The LCD screen should not be colored.
Specified Value The brightness difference between the
section A and section B is minimum. Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of the LCD 1. LCD panel
automatic adjustment. 2. Light induction plate
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. 3. IC602
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Switch setting:
LCD BACKLIGHT .................................................................. ON Switch setting:
LCD BACKLIGHT .................................................................. ON
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 C 61 CD Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. 2 C 56 7D Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 C 52 Change the data so that the
brightness of the section A and 3 C 57 73 Set the data, and press PAUSE
that of the section B is equal. button.
4 C 52 Subtract 7 from the data. 4 C 57 Check that the LCD screen is not
colored. If not colored, proceed to
5 C 52 Press PAUSE button.
step 10.
6 C 61 C5 Set the data, and press PAUSE
5 C 56 Change the data so that the LCD
button.
screen is not colored.
7 0 01 00 Set the data.
6 C 56 Press PAUSE button.
7 C 57 Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
8 C 57 Press PAUSE button.
B A 9 C 57 If the LCD screen is colored,
repeat steps 5 to 9.
A B 10 0 01 00 Set the data.

B A

A B

Fig. 6-1-13.

6-37
DCR-HC40/HC40E

4. Reflective Mode White Balance Adjustment


(PD-213 board)
Correct the white balance of the reflective mode.
If deviated, the reproduction of the LCD screen may degenerate.
Mode CAMERA-TAPE
Subject Arbitrary
Adjustment Page C
Adjustment Address 7B, 7C

Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Switch setting:
LCD BACKLIGHT ................................................................. OFF

Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 3 0C 20 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 3 22 0F Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 3 01 66 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
5 3 02 Check that the data changes to
“00”.
6 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note2)
7 3 01 67 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
8 3 02 Check that the data changes to
“00”.
9 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note2)
10 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
11 3 22 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
12 0 01 00 Set the data.

Note2: If the data is “01”, adjustment becomes time out.

6-38
DCR-HC40/HC40E

6-2. MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT 2-3. TAPE PATH ADJUSTMENT

On the mechanism section adjustment 1. Preparation for Adjustment


For detail of mechanism section adjustments, checks, and 1) Clean the tape running side (tape guide, drum, capstan shaft,
replacement of mechanism parts, refer to the separate volume “DV pinch roller, etc.).
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL Z Mechanism ”. 2) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack.
Note: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0, 3) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander
address: 10 is “00”. If not, set data: 00 to this address. to the ON position.
4) Connect an oscilloscope to VC-352 board CN1207 via the CPC
2-1. HOW TO ENTER RECORD MODE WITHOUT connecting jigs. (J-6082-521-A, J-6082-564-A)
CASSETTE Channel 1: VC-352 board, CN1207 Pin 1 (Note)
External trigger: VC-352 board, CN1207 Pin 2
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack. Note: Connect a 75Ω resistor between Pins 1 of CN1207 and 3
(GND).
2) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander
5) Playback the alignment tape for tracking. (XH2-1)
to the ON position.
6) Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 08.
3) Close the cassette compartment without the cassette.
7) Select page: 3, address: 26, set data: 31, and press PAUSE
4) Select page: 3, address: 01, and set data: 0C, and press the
button.
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.
8) Check that the oscilloscope RF waveform is normal at the
(The mechanism enters the record mode automatically.)
Note: The function buttons becomes inoperable. entrance and exit.
5) To quit the record mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data: If not normal, adjust according to the separate volume “DV
00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL Z Mechanism ”.
commander. (Whenever you want to quit the record mode, be
sure to quit following this procedure.) CN1207 of VC-352 board
Pin No. Signal Name
2-2. HOW TO ENTER PLAYBACK MODE WITHOUT 1 RF MON
CASSETTE 2 SWP
1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack.
3 GND
2) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander
to the ON position. 4 XCS EEP
3) Close the cassette compartment without the cassette. 5 EEP SCK
4) Select page: 3, address: 01, and set data: 0B, and press the 6 EEP SO
PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. 7 EEP SI
(The mechanism enters the playback mode automatically.) 8 GND
Note: The function buttons becomes inoperable.
5) To quit the playback mode, select page: 3, address: 01, set data: Table 6-2-1.
00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote
commander. (Whenever you want to quit the playback mode, 2. Processing after Completing Operations:
be sure to quit following this procedure.) 1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC jack
and set the HOLD switch to the ON position.
2) Select page: 3, address: 26, and set data: 00, and press PAUSE
button.
3) Select page: 3, address: 33, and set data: 00.

Entrance Check this section Exit side


side (Normal waveform)

CH1

CH2
(Trigger)

3.3 msec

Fig. 6-2-1.

6-39
DCR-HC40/HC40E

6-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT


3-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS

Use the following measuring instruments for video section


adjustments.

3-1-1. Equipment to Required


1) TV monitor
2) Oscilloscope (dual-phenomenon, band width above 30 MHz
with delay mode) (Unless specified otherwise, use a 10 : 1
probe.)
3) Frequency counter
4) Pattern generator with video output terminal
5) Digital voltmeter
6) Audio generator
7) Audio level meter
8) Audio distortion meter
9) Audio attenuator
10) Regulated power supply
11) Alignment tapes
• Tracking standard (XH2-1)
Parts code: 8-967-997-01
• SW/OL standard (XH2-3)
Parts code: 8-967-997-11
• Audio operation check for NTSC (XH5-3)
Parts code: 8-967-997-51
• System operation check for NTSC (XH5-5)
Parts code: 8-967-997-61
• Audio operation check for PAL (XH5-3P)
Parts code: 8-967-997-55
• System operation check for PAL (XH5-5P)
Parts code: 8-967-997-66
12) Adjustment remote commander (J-6082-053-B)
13) CPC connecting jigs
(J-6082-521-A, J-6082-564-A)

6-40
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting Note2: Setting the “Forced VTR Power ON” mode (PLAY/EDIT mode)
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
Note1:Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0, 2) Select page: A, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE
address: 10 is “00”. If not, set data: 00 to this address. button of the adjusting remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the VTR power to be turned on
with the control key block (SS6300 block) removed.
1) The adjustments of this unit are performed in the VTR mode
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power
(PLAY/EDIT mode) or camera mode (CAMERA-TAPE mode). ON mode”.
To set to the VTR mode, set the mode switch to “PLAY/EDIT” Note3: Setting the “Forced Camera Power ON” mode (CAMERA-TAPE
or set the “Forced VTR Power ON mode” using the adjusting mode)
remote commander (Note2). 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
To set to the camera mode, set the mode switch to “CAMERA- 2) Select page: A, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE
TAPE” or set the “Forced Camera Power ON mode” using the button of the adjusting remote commander.
adjusting remote commander (Note3). The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned
on with the control key block (SS6300 block) removed.
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced VTR
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power
Power ON Mode” or “Forced Camera Power ON Mode”. ON mode”.
(Note5) Note4: Setting the “Forced Memory Power ON” mode (CAMERA-
2) The cabinet (R) block need not be connected. To remove it, MEMORY mode)
disconnect the following connectors. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
VC-352 board CN1202 (8P, 0.5mm) 2) Select page: A, address: 10, set data: 05, and press the PAUSE
VC-352 board CN1212 (6P, 0.5mm) button of the adjusting remote commander.
VC-352 board CN1206 (22P, 0.5mm) The above procedure will enable the memory power to be turned
on with the control key block (SS6300 block) removed.
3) The front panel block (Microphone unit, IR-051 board) need
After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power
not be connected. To remove it, disconnect the following ON mode”.
connector. Note5: Exiting the “Forced Power ON” mode
IR-051 board CN602 (16P, 0.5mm) 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
4) The EVF and intelligent accessory shoe block and the battery 2) Select page: A, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE
panel section need not be connected except for the DC IN jack button of the adjusting remote commander.
of the battery panel section. To remove them, disconnect the 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 0
following connector.
VC-352 board CN1203 (10P, 0.5mm)
VC-352 board CN9301 (20P, 0.5mm)
The following connector must be connected to connect the DC
IN jack.
VC-352 board CN2101 (26P, 0.5mm)
5) The lens block (CD-490 board, SE-141 board) need not be
connected. To remove it, disconnect the following connectors.
VC-352 board CN5001 (33P, 0.3mm)
VC-352 board CN5101 (29P, 0.3mm)
SE-141 board CN401 (6P, 0.5mm)
6) By setting the “Forced VTR Power ON mode”, the VTR section
can be operate even if the control key block (SS6300) has been
removed. When removing it, disconnect the following
connector.
VC-352 board CN1201 (18P, 0.5mm)
When the control key block (SS6300) is removed, the VTR
function buttons of the adjustment remote commander are not
effective even if the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote
commander is set to the OFF position. So connect the LCD
block and operate the VTR functions using the touch panel.
7) The MS-200 board need not be connected. But removing the
MS-200 board (removing the VC-352 board CN1205) means
removing the lithium 3V power supply (MS-200 board, BT501),
data such as date, time, user-set menus will be lost. After
completing adjustments, reset these data.
But, the self-diagnosis data and the data on history of use (total
drum rotation time etc.) will be kept even if the MS-200 board
has been removed. (Refer to “6-4.Service Mode” for the data
on the history use.)
To remove the MS-200 board, disconnect the following
connectors.
VC-352 board CN1205 (20P 0.5mm)

6-41
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3-1-3. Adjusting Connectors


The measuring point of the playback RF signal is CN1207 of VC-
352 board. Connect the measuring instruments via the CPC
connecting jigs (J-6082-521-A, J-6082-564-A). Refer to
“MECHANISM SECTION ADJUSTMENT” for the measuring
method. The following table lists the pin numbers and signal names
CN1207
of CN1207. 8
Pin No. Signal Name
1 RF MON
2 SWP 1
3 GND
4 XCS EEP
5 EEP SCK
6 EEP SO
7 EEP SI
Remove the CPC lid
8 GND
Table 6-3-1. Fig. 6-3-1.

3-1-4. Connecting the Equipment


Connect the measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 6-3-2, and
perform the adjustments.

TV monitor

VIDEO
(Yellow)
Main unit
AUDIO L (White)
Adjustment
remote
commander
AUDIO R (Red)
LANC jack AUDIO/VIDEO jack

Fig. 6-3-2.

6-42
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3-1-5. Alignment Tapes


Use the alignment tapes shown in the following table.
Use tapes specified in the signal column of each adjustment.
Name Use
Tracking standard (XH2-1) Tape path adjustment
SW/OL standard (XH2-3) Switching position adjustment
Audio operation check
Audio system adjustment
(XH5-3 (NTSC), XH5-3P (PAL))
System operation check
Operation check
(XH5-5 (NTSC), XH5-5P (PAL))

Fig. 6-3-3 shows the 75% color bar signals recorded on the alignment
tape for Audio Operation Check.

Note: Measure with video terminal (Terminated at 75 Ω)

For NTSC model


White (100%)
Yellow

Cyan

Magenta
Green

White (75%)

Magenta
Red

White
Blue

Burst signal

Yellow

Green
Cyan

Red

Blue
0.714V
(75%)
1V
0.286V
0.286V Q I Black
Q I

White
(100%)
Horizontal sync signal
Color bar signal waveform Color bar pattern

For PAL model


White (100%)
Yellow

Green
Cyan

Magenta
Red
Blue

0.7V
Magenta
Green
Yellow

1V
Cyan
White

Red
Blue
Black
0.3V
0.3V (100%)

Burst signal
Horizontal sync signal

Color bar signal waveform Color bar pattern

Fig. 6-3-3. Color bar signal of alignment tapes

3-1-6. Input/Output Level and Impedance


Video input/output Audio input/output
A/V jack A/V jack
Video signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced, Input level: 327mV
sync negative Input impedance: More than 47kΩ
S video input/output Output level: 327 mV (at load impedance 47 kΩ)
A/V jack Output impedance: Below 2.2 kΩ
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced,
sync negative
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced (NTSC)
: 0.300 Vp-p, 75 Ω unbalanced (PAL)

6-43
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3-2. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

1. Initialization of 8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C,


1E, 1F Page Data
If the 8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E, 1F page data
is erased due to some reason, perform “1-2. INITIALIZATION OF
8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E, 1F PAGE DATA” of
“6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT”
Note: When reading or writing the 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E, 1F page
data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 01, then select 4, 8, 9,
A, B, C, E or F page. The 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E or 1F page can
be chosen by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
“00”.

2. Touch Panel Adjustment


Adjust the calibration of the touch panel.
Mode PLAY/EDIT (VTR stop)
Signal Arbitrary
Adjustment Page A
Adjustment Address 90 to 93

Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of the LCD
system adjustments.
Note2: Perform this adjustment with observing the screen from the front.
Note3: Check that a Memory Stick Duo is not inserted.
Note4: Check that the LCD panel is not reverse mode.
Note5: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Preparation:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 5 01 01 Set the data.
2 5 05 00 Set the data.
3 5 06 C7 Set the data.
A
4 5 07 00 Set the data. C
5 5 08 00 Set the data.
6 5 09 00 Set the data.
7 5 0A FF Set the data.
8 5 0B 00 Set the data. B
9 5 0C 00 Set the data.
10 5 0D 00 Set the data.
11 5 0E 01 Set the data.
Fig. 6-3-4.
12 5 00 01 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
13 Check that the touch panel
adjustment screen is displayed.
(Fig. 6-3-4.)
14 Perform “Adjusting method”.

Adjusting method:
1) Using a stylus, push the center of “X” indicated in the part A.
2) Using a stylus, push the center of “X” indicated in the part B.
3) Using a stylus, push the center of “X” indicated in the part C.

6-44
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3. Serial No. Input 7) Obtain the difference D 4 between D 2 and D 3 .


3-1. Company ID Input (Decimal calculation, 0 D4 255)
Write the company ID in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). D4 = D2 – D3
Page C Example: If D2 is “12345” and D3 is “12288”.
D4 =12345 – 12288 = 57
Address E0, E1, E2, E3, E4
8) Convert D4 to hexadecimal, and take this as H4.
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
(Refer to “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table” in “6-4.
Service Mode”.)
Input method: Example: If D4 is “57”.
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. H4=39
2) Input the following data to page: C, addresses: E0 to E4. 9) Input the upper 2 digits of H3 to page: C, address: E6.
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander Example: If H3 is “3000”.
each time to set the data. Select page: C, address: E6, set data: 30, and
press the PAUSE button.
Address Data
10) Input H4 to page: C, address: E7.
E0 08 Example: If H4 is “39”.
E1 00 Select page: C, address: E7, set data: 39, and
E2 46 press the PAUSE button.
E3 01 11) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
E4 02
H1 (Hexadecimal)
3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. D1 (Decimal) D2 (Decimal)
(Service model code)
3-2. Serial No. Input 000001 to 065535 D1 FE
Write the serial No. and model code in the EEPROM (nonvolatile 065536 to 131071 D1 – 65536 FE
memory). Convert the serial No. on the name plate from decimal to 131072 to 196607 D1 – 131072 FE
hexadecimal, and write in the EEPROM. 196608 to 262143 D1 – 196608 FE
Page C 262144 to 327679 D1 – 262144 FE
Address E5, E6, E7 327680 to 393215 D1 – 327680 FE
393216 to 458751 D1 – 393216 FE
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
458752 to 524287 D1 – 458752 FE
Input method: 524288 to 589823 D1 – 524288 FE
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 589824 to 655359 D1 – 589824 FE
2) Read the serial No. on the name plate, and take it as D1. 655360 to 720895 D1 – 655360 FE
Example: If the serial No. is 77881. 720896 to 786431 D1 – 720896 FE
D1=77881
Note: Use six digits of the low rank when a serial No. is more than
786432 to 851967 D1 – 786432 FE
seven digits. 851968 to 917503 D1 – 851968 FE
3) Obtain D2 and H1 corresponding to D1 from Table 6-3-2. 917504 to 983039 D1 – 917504 FE
Example: If D1 is “77881”. 983040 to 999999 D1 – 983040 FE
D2 = D1 – 65536 = 12345
H1 = FE Table 6-3-2.
4) Input H1 to page: C, address: E5. (Model code input)
Example: If H1 is “FE”.
Select page: C, address: E5, set data: FE,
andpress the PAUSE button.
5) Obtain the maximum decimal not exceeding D2 from Table 6-
3-3, and take this as D3.
Example: If D2 is “12345”.
D3 = 12288
6) Obtain the hexadecimal corresponding to D3 from Table 6-3-
3, and take this as H3.
Example: If D3 is “12288”.
H3 = 3000

6-45
DCR-HC40/HC40E

Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa- Hexa-


Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal Decimal decimal
(D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3) (D3) (H3)
0 0000 8192 2000 16384 4000 24576 6000 32768 8000 40960 A000 49152 C000 57344 E000
256 0100 8448 2100 16640 4100 24832 6100 33024 8100 41216 A100 49408 C100 57600 E100
512 0200 8704 2200 16896 4200 25088 6200 33280 8200 41472 A200 49664 C200 57856 E200
768 0300 8960 2300 17152 4300 25344 6300 33536 8300 41728 A300 49920 C300 58112 E300
1024 0400 9216 2400 17408 4400 25600 6400 33792 8400 41984 A400 50176 C400 58368 E400
1280 0500 9472 2500 17664 4500 25856 6500 34048 8500 42240 A500 50432 C500 58624 E500
1536 0600 9728 2600 17920 4600 26112 6600 34304 8600 42496 A600 50688 C600 58880 E600
1792 0700 9984 2700 18176 4700 26368 6700 34560 8700 42752 A700 50944 C700 59136 E700
2048 0800 10240 2800 18432 4800 26624 6800 34816 8800 43008 A800 51200 C800 59392 E800
2304 0900 10496 2900 18688 4900 26880 6900 35072 8900 43264 A900 51456 C900 59648 E900
2560 0A00 10752 2A00 18944 4A00 27136 6A00 35328 8A00 43520 AA00 51712 CA00 59904 EA00
2816 0B00 11008 2B00 19200 4B00 27392 6B00 35584 8B00 43776 AB00 51968 CB00 60160 EB00
3072 0C00 11264 2C00 19456 4C00 27648 6C00 35840 8C00 44032 AC00 52224 CC00 60416 EC00
3328 0D00 11520 2D00 19712 4D00 27904 6D00 36096 8D00 44288 AD00 52480 CD00 60672 ED00
3584 0E00 11776 2E00 19968 4E00 28160 6E00 36352 8E00 44544 AE00 52736 CE00 60928 EE00
3840 0F00 12032 2F00 20224 4F00 28416 6F00 36608 8F00 44800 AF00 52992 CF00 61184 EF00
4096 1000 12288 3000 20480 5000 28672 7000 36864 9000 45056 B000 53248 D000 61440 F000
4352 1100 12544 3100 20736 5100 28928 7100 37120 9100 45312 B100 53504 D100 61696 F100
4608 1200 12800 3200 20992 5200 29184 7200 37376 9200 45568 B200 53760 D200 61952 F200
4864 1300 13056 3300 21248 5300 29440 7300 37632 9300 45824 B300 54016 D300 62208 F300
5120 1400 13312 3400 21504 5400 29696 7400 37888 9400 46080 B400 54272 D400 62464 F400
5376 1500 13568 3500 21760 5500 29952 7500 38144 9500 46336 B500 54528 D500 62720 F500
5632 1600 13824 3600 22016 5600 30208 7600 38400 9600 46592 B600 54784 D600 62976 F600
5888 1700 14080 3700 22272 5700 30464 7700 38656 9700 46848 B700 55040 D700 63232 F700
6144 1800 14336 3800 22528 5800 30720 7800 38912 9800 47104 B800 55296 D800 63488 F800
6400 1900 14592 3900 22784 5900 30976 7900 39168 9900 47360 B900 55552 D900 63744 F900
6656 1A00 14848 3A00 23040 5A00 31232 7A00 39424 9A00 47616 BA00 55808 DA00 64000 FA00
6912 1B00 15104 3B00 23296 5B00 31488 7B00 39680 9B00 47872 BB00 56064 DB00 64256 FB00
7168 1C00 15360 3C00 23552 5C00 31744 7C00 39936 9C00 48128 BC00 56320 DC00 64512 FC00
7424 1D00 15616 3D00 23808 5D00 32000 7D00 40192 9D00 48384 BD00 56576 DD00 64768 FD00
7680 1E00 15872 3E00 24064 5E00 32256 7E00 40448 9E00 48640 BE00 56832 DE00 65024 FE00
7936 1F00 16128 3F00 24320 5F00 32512 7F00 40704 9F00 48896 BF00 57088 DF00 65280 FF00
Table 6-3-3.

6-46
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3-3. SERVO AND RF SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 2. Switching Position Adjustment (VC-352 Board)
Before perform the servo and RF system adjustments, check that
the specified value of “54 MHz (HC40E)/66 MHz (HC40) Origin To obtain normal playback waveform output during the playback
Oscillation Check” of “CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is mode, adjust the switching position.
satisfied. Mode VTR playback (PLAY/EDIT)
And check that the data of page: 0, address: 10 is “00”. If not, set Signal SW/OL reference tape (XH2-3)
data: 00 to this address.
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 02, 03
Adjusting Procedure: Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
1. CAP FG duty adjustment Adjustment Page C
2. Switching position adjustment Adjustment Address 10, 11, 12, 13
3. Error rate check
Specified Value Data of page: 3, address: 02 is “00”.
1. Cap FG Duty Adjustment (VC-352 Board) Data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”.
Set the Cap FG signal duty cycle to 50% to establish an appropriate
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
capstan servo. If deviated, the uneven rotation of capstan and noise
can occur.
Adjusting method:
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 02, 03
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander
1 Insert the SW/OL reference tape
Adjustment Page C and enter the VTR STOP mode.
Adjustment Address 16 2 0 01 01 Set the data.
Specified Value Data of page: 3, address: 02 is “00”. 3 C 10 EE Set the data, and press PAUSE
Data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”. button.
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
4 3 21 Check that the data is “02”.
(Note2)
Adjusting method: 5 3 01 0D Set the data, and press PAUSE
Order Page Address Data Procedure button.
1 Close the cassette compartment 6 3 02 Check that the data changes to
without inserting a cassette. “00”.
2 0 01 01 Set the data. 7 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note3)
3 3 01 1B Set the data, and press PAUSE
button. 8 0 01 00 Set the data.
4 3 02 Check that the data changes in Note2: If the data of page: 3, address: 21 is “72”, the tape top being played.
the following order. After playing the tape for 1 to 2 seconds, stop it, perform step 5
“1B” → “2B” → “00” and higher.
5 3 03 Check that the data is “00”. If the data of page: 3, address: 21 is “62”, the tape end being played.
After rewinding the tape, perform step 5 and higher.
(Note2)
Note3: If bit 0 of the data is “1”, the EVEN channel is defective. If bit 1 is
6 0 01 00 Set the data. “1”, the ODD channel is defective. Contents of the defect is written
into page: C, addresses: 10 and 12. See the following table. (For
Note2: If the data is “01”, adjustment has errors or the mechanism deck is the bit values, refer to “6-4. SERVICE MODE”, “4-3. 4. Bit value
defective. discrimination”. ) If bit 3 of the data is “1”, the tape end being
played, so rewind the tape and perform the adjustment again.

When the EVEN channel is defective


Data of page: C,
Contents of defect
address: 10
EE Writing into EEPROM (IC8802) is defective
E8 Adjustment data is out of range
E7 No data is returned from IC6401

When the ODD channel is defective


Data of page: C,
Contents of defect
address: 12
EE Writing into EEPROM (IC8802) is defective
E8 Adjustment data is out of range
E7 No data is returned from IC6401

6-47
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3. Error Rate Check


Initial Value of Page 1C: Address: B3 to C8
3-1. Preparations before adjustments Address Initial Address Initial Address Initial
Mode Camera recording (CAMERA-TAPE) value value value
Subject Arbitrary B3 00 BB 00 C3 80
B4 00 BC 00 C4 00
Note1: The data of page: 1C, address: B3 to C8 must be initial value. (See B5 00 BD 00 C5 00
Table 6-3-4.)
B6 00 BE 00 C6 00
Adjusting method: B7 00 BF 00 C7 00
Order Page Address Data Procedure B8 80 C0 00 C8 00
B9 00 C1 00
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
BA 00 C2 00
2 0 10 01 Set the data.
3 C 0D C8 Set the data, and press PAUSE Table 6-3-4.
button.
Note5: When writing the 1C page data, select page: 0, address: 10, and
4 0 10 00 Set the data.
set data: 01, then select C page.
5 Record the camera signal for After writing the initial values, reset the data of page: 0, address:
two minutes. 10 to “00”.

3-2. Error Rate Check 3-3. Processing after Completing Adjustments


Mode Playback (PLAY/EDIT) Order Page Address Data Procedure
Signal Recorded signal at “Preparations 1 0 01 01 Set the data.
before adjustments” 2 0 10 01 Set the data.
Measurement Point Display data of page: 3, address: 02, 03 3 C 0D 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote commander button.
Adjustment Page 1C (Note2) 4 0 01 00 Set the data.
Adjustment Address B3 to C8 5 0 10 00 Set the data.
Specified Value Data of page: 3, address: 02 is “00”.
Data of page: 3, address: 03 is “00”.

Note2: When reading or writing the 1C page data, select page: 0, address:
10, and set data: 01, then select C page. The 1C page can be chosen
by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to
“00”.

Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 Playback the recorded signal at
“Preparations before
adjustments”
2 0 01 01 Set the data.
3 0 10 00 Set the data.
4 3 1D Check that the data is “20”.
5 3 01 40 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
6 3 02 Check that the data changes
from “40” to “00”.
7 3 03 Check that the data is “00”.
(Note3)
8 Perform “Processing after
Completing Adjustments”
Note3: If the data is other than “00”, Error rate is abnormal.
For the contents of the abnormality, see the following table.
Data of page: 3, Contents of the abnormality
address: 03
01 EVEN ch is abnormal.
02 ODD ch is abnormal.
03 EVEN ch and ODD ch are abnormal.
Note4: If Error rate is abnormal, Check the use tape, clean the tape running
surface. And after inputting initial values to page 1C: address: B3
to C8, perform re-adjustment. (See Table 6-3-4.)

6-48
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3-4. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment (VC-352 Board)
Note1: Before perform the servo and RF system adjustments, check that Mode CAMERA-TAPE
the specified value of “54MHz (HC40E)/66MHz (HC40) Origin
Oscillation Check” of “CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” is Subject Arbitrary
satisfied. Measurement Point Chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO
And check that the data of page: 0, address: 10 is “00”. If not, set plug of A/V jack (75Ω terminated)
data: 00 to this address.
External trigger: Y signal terminal of
Note2: NTSC model : DCR-HC40
PAL model : DCR-HC40E
S VIDEO plug of A/V jack
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
1. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-352 Board) Adjustment Page C
Mode CAMERA–TAPE Adjustment Address 26, 27
Subject Arbitrary Specified Value Cr level : A = 714 ± 14mV (NTSC)
Measurement Point Y signal terminal of S VIDEO plug of A = 700 ± 14mV (PAL)
A/V jack (75Ω terminated) Cb level : B = 714 ± 14mV (NTSC)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope B = 700 ± 14mV (PAL)
Burst level : C = 286 ± 6mV (NTSC)
Adjustment Page C C = 300 ± 6mV (PAL)
Adjustment Address 25
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Specified Value A = 1000 ± 14mV
Switch setting:
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”. DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ................................................ OFF

Switch setting: Adjusting method:


DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ................................................ OFF Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
Adjusting method:
2 8 4C 94 Set the data, and press PAUSE
Order Page Address Data Procedure button.
1 0 01 01 Set the data. 3 3 0C 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE
2 8 4C 94 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button. 4 C 26 Change the data and set the Cr signal
3 3 0C 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE level (A) to the specified value.
button. 5 C 26 Press PAUSE button.
4 C 25 Change the data and set the Y 6 C 27 Change the data and set the Cb signal
signal level (A) to the specified level (B) to the specified value.
value.
7 C 27 Press PAUSE button.
5 C 25 Press PAUSE button.
8 Check that the burst signal level
6 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE (C) is satisfied the specified value.
button.
9 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
7 8 4C 96 Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
button.
10 8 4C 96 Set the data, and press PAUSE
8 0 01 00 Set the data. button.
11 0 01 00 Set the data.

C
A

Fig. 6-3-5.
A B

0.28 µsec (NTSC) 0.28 µsec (NTSC)


0.23 µsec (PAL) 0.23 µsec (PAL)
Fig. 6-3-6.

6-49
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-352 Board)


Mode CAMERA-TAPE
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Video plug of A/V jack
(75Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Specified Value Sync level : A = 286 ± 18mV (NTSC)
A = 300 ± 18mV (PAL)
Burst level : B = 286 ± 18mV (NTSC)
B = 300 ± 18mV (PAL)

Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Switch setting:
DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ................................................ OFF

Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 0 01 01 Set the data.
2 8 4C 94 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
3 3 0C 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
4 Check that the sync signal level
(A) satisfies the specified value.
5 Check that the burst signal level
(B) satisfies the specified value.
6 3 0C 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
7 8 4C 96 Set the data, and press PAUSE
button.
8 0 01 00 Set the data.

B
A

Fig. 6-3-7.

6-50
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3-5. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

[Connection of Audio System Measuring Devices]


Connect the audio system measuring devices as shown in Fig. 6-3-8.

Recording (CAMERA–TAPE mode) Main unit

MIC
Audio oscillator 600 Ω Left

Attenuator Right

600 Ω: 270 Ω (1-249-410-11) + 330 Ω (1-249-411-11)

Playback (PLAY/EDIT mode)


Main unit
TV monitor
Video (Yellow)

Left (White)
Audio level meter
AUDIO/ 47k Ω or Distortion meter
VIDEO Right
OUT
(Red) 47k Ω

47k Ω (1-249-437-11)

Fig. 6-3-8.

6-51
DCR-HC40/HC40E

1. Playback Level Check 4. Overall Noise Level Check


Mode VTR playback Mode Camera recording and playback
Signal Alignment tape: Signal No signal: Insert a shorting plug in the
For audio operation check MIC jack
(XH5-3 (NTSC)) Measurement Point Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
(XH5-3P (PAL)) VIDEO jack
Measurement Point Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO Measuring Instrument Audio level meter
VIDEO jack
Specified Value Below –45dBs
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter and frequency (IHF-A filter ON, 20kHz LPF ON)
counter
Specified Value 32 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs Checking Method:
48 kHz mode: 1 kHz, +3.0 ± 2.0dBs 1) Insert a shorting plug in the MIC jack.
44.1 kHz mode: 2) Record in the camera mode.
The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP 3) Playback the recorded section.
OFF is +2.0 ± 2.0dBs. 4) Check that the noise level is the specified value.
The 7.35kHz signal level during EMP
ON is –6 ± 2 dB from the signal level
during EMP OFF. 5. Overall Separation Check
Mode Camera recording and playback
Checking Method:
Signal 400Hz, –66dBs signal: MIC jack
1) Check that the playback signal level is the specified value.
<right> [left]
(Connect the MIC jack <left> [right]
to GND)
2. Overall Level Characteristics Check
Measurement Point Audio <left> [right] terminal of
Mode Camera recording and playback
AUDIO VIDEO jack
Signal 400Hz, –66 dBs signal: MIC jack left
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter
and right
Specified Value Below –40dBs (IHF-A filter ON)
Measurement Point Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
VIDEO jack
< > : Left channel check
Measuring Instrument Audio level meter [ ] : Right channel check
Specified Value –7.5 ± 3.0dBs
Checking Method:
Checking Method: 1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the <right> [left] terminal
1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the MIC jack. of the MIC jack only.
2) Record in the camera mode. 2) Record in the camera mode.
3) Playback the recorded section. 3) Playback the recorded section.
4) Check that the 400Hz signal level is the specified value. 4) Check that the signal level of the audio <left> [right] terminal
is the specified value.

3. Overall Distortion Check


Mode Camera recording and playback
Signal 400Hz, –66dBs signal: MIC jack left
and right
Measurement Point Audio left or right terminal of AUDIO
VIDEO jack
Measuring Instrument Audio distortion meter
Specified Value Below 0.4%
(200Hz to 6kHz BPF ON)

Checking Method:
1) Input the 400Hz, –66dBs signal in the MIC jack.
2) Record in the camera mode.
3) Playback the recorded section.
4) Check that the distortion is the specified value.

6-52
DCR-HC40/HC40E

6-4. SERVICE MODE


4-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER 2. Precautions upon using
The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the the adjustment remote commander
calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the
adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended
communication with the unit using the remote commander signal that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments
line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
is written in the non-volatile memory.

1. Using the adjustment remote commander


1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC
terminal.
2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to
“HOLD” (SERVICE position). If it has been properly
connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will
display as shown in Fig. 6-4-1.

Page Data Address

Fig. 6-4-1

3) Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows.


• Changing the page
The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is
pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH– button
is pressed. Page to use for the adjustment are 22 pages of 0
to 3, 5 to 8, A to F, 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E and 1F.
Hexadecimal
notation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
LCD Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F
Decimal notation
conversion value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15

• Changing the address


The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed,
and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.
• Changing the data (Data setting)
The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed,
and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There
are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.
• Writing the adjustment data
The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment
data (8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E, 1F
page) in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjusting data
will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is
not performed.)
4) After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power
supply once.

Note: When reading or writing the 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1E, 1F
page data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 01, then
select 4, 8, 9, A, B, C, E or F page. The 14, 18, 19, 1A, 1B, 1C,
1E or 1F page can be chosen by this data setting.
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10
to “00”.

6-53
DCR-HC40/HC40E

4-2. DATA PROCESS


The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote
commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for
obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case,
after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation,
calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it
as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal
conversion table.

Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table 2


Lower digit of
hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Upper digit ( A) (b ) (c) ( d) ( E) ( F)
of hexadecimal
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159
A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175
1 B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
F ( F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
Note: The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander.
(Example) If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD (bd);
Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the meeting point
“189” of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number.

Table. 6-4-1.

6-54
DCR-HC40/HC40E

4-3. SERVICE MODE 3. Emergence Memory Address (Mechanism section)


Page C Address F4 to FF
Note: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0,
address: 10 is “00”. If not, set data: 00 to this address. Address Contents
F4 EMG code when first error occurs
1. Setting the Test Mode
Upper: MSW code when shift starts when first
Page A Address 10 F6 error occurs
Lower: MSW code when first error occurs
Data Function Lower: MSW code to be moved when first error
00 Normal F7
occurs
01 Forced camera power ON (CAMERA-TAPE mode) F8 EMG code when second error occurs
02 Forced VTR power ON (PLAY/EDIT mode) Upper: MSW code when shift starts when second
03 Forced camera + VTR power ON FA error occurs
05 Forced memory power ON (CAMERA-MEMORY mode) Lower: MSW code when second error occurs
Lower: MSW code to be moved when second error
FB
• Before setting the data , select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. occurs
• For page A, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory FC EMG code when last error occurs
by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote Upper: MSW code when shift starts when last error
commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be FE occurs
exited even when the main power is turned off. Lower: MSW code when last error occurs
• After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data
Lower: MSW code to be moved when last error
of this address to 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment FF
occurs
remote commander.
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. When no error occurs in this unit, data “00” is written in the above
addresses (F4 to FF). when first error occurs in the unit, the data
2. Emergence Memory Address (Camera section) corresponding to the error is written in the first emergency address
(F4 to F7). In the same way, when the second error occurs, the data
Page 19 Address 87 to 8A corresponding to the error is written in the second emergency address
(F8 to FB). Finally, when the last error occurs, the data corresponding
Note: When reading or writing the 19 page data, select page: 0, address: to the error is written in the last emergency address (FC to FF).
10, and set data: 01, then select 9 page. The 19 page can be chosen
by this data setting. Note: After completing adjustments, be sure to initialize the data of
After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to “00”. addresses F4 to FF to “00”.
Address Contents
Initializing method:
87 EMG code when first error occurs
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
88 EMG code when second error occurs 2) Select page: 3, address: 01, set data: 37, and press the PAUSE
89 EMG code when third error occurs button.
8A EMG code when last error occurs 3) Check that the data of page:3, address:02 is “00”.
4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
2-1. EMG Code (Emergency Code)
Codes corresponding to the errors which occur are written in 19 3-1. EMG Code (Emergency Code)
page, addresses 87 to 8A.. The type of error indicated by the code Codes corresponding to the errors which occur are written in
are shown in the following table. addresses F4, F8 and FC. The type of error indicated by the code
Code Emergency Type are shown in the following table.
00 No error Code Emergency Type
Note: After completing adjustments, be sure to initialize the data of 00 No error
addresses 87 to 8A to “00”. 10 Loading motor emergency during loading
11 Loading motor emergency during unloading
Initializing method: 22 T reel emergency during normal rotation
1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.
23 S reel emergency during normal rotation
2) Select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 00.
3) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: FD and press the PAUSE T reel emergency (Short circuit between S reel
24
button. terminal and T reel terminal)
4) Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “01”. 30 FG emergency at the start up of the capstan
5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00 and press the PAUSE 40 FG emergency at the start up of the drum
button. 42 FG emergency during normal rotation of the drum
6) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

6-55
DCR-HC40/HC40E

3-2. MSW Code


MSW when errors occur:
Information on MSW (mode SW) when errors occur
MSW when movement starts:
Information on MSW when movements starts when the mechanism position is moved (When the L motor is moved)
MSW of target of movement:
Information on target MSW of movement when the mechanism position is moved

Mechanical Position
← UNLOAD LOAD →
EJ BL ULE BL SR BL HL BL STOP BL R/P
← A (MSB)
0 1 0 0 = 4

0 1 1 0 = 6

0 0 1 0 = 2

1 0 1 0 = A

1 0 0 0 = 8

1 1 0 0 = C
1 1 1 0 = E

1 1 1 0 = E

1 1 1 0 = E

1 1 1 0 = E

1 1 1 0 = E
←B
←C
← D (LSB) (Fixed at “0”)

LS chassis movement section

Lock released Pinch roller pressing


Cassette compartment

Position Code Contents


Position at which the cassette component lock is released, at the farthest unload side mechanically
EJ 4
at which the mechanism can move no further in the UNLOAD direction.
BL E BLANK code, at the boundary between codes.
EJECT completion position. when the cassette is ejected, the mechanism will stop at this position.
ULE 6 Cassette IN standby. The guide will start protruding out as the mechanism moves towards the
LOAD position.
SR 2 Position at which it is possible to release the S ratchet.
HL A Guide loading are performed here.
Stop position in the loading state. The pinch roller separates, the tension regulator returns, and the
STOP 8
brake is imposed on both reels.
PB, REC, CUE, REVIEW, PAUSE, FF, REW positions. When pinch roller is pressed, and the tension
R/P C regulator is ON, the mechanism is operating at this position in modes in which normal images are
shown.
NULL 0 Code not existing in the MD. Default value.
F Status before finding any mechanism position.

6-56
DCR-HC40/HC40E

4. Bit value discrimination Display on the Bit values


Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the adjustment bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
adjustment remote commander for following items. Use the table remote or or or or
below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”. commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
Display on the adjustment remote commander
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
Address 6 0 1 1 0
Page bit3 to bit0 discrimination 7 0 1 1 1
bit7 to bit4 discrimination A 8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
A (A) 1 0 1 0
B (b) 1 0 1 1
C (c) 1 1 0 0
D (d) 1 1 0 1
B E (E) 1 1 1 0
F (F ) 1 1 1 1
Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjustment remote commander, the
bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the
bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column.

5. Switch check (1)


Page 2 Address 81

Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0


0 POWER SW (XPOWER SW) (SS6300 block) ON OFF
1 MODE SW (XMODE SW) (SS6300 block) ON OFF
2 EJECT SW (XEJECT SW) (SS6300 block S004) ON OFF
3 CC DOWN SW (Mechanism chassis) ON (DOWN) OFF (UP)
4 DISPLAY/BATTERY INFO SW (XBATT INFO SW) ON OFF
(CF6300 block S003)
Using method:
1) Select page: 2, address: 81.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

6. Switch check (2)


Page 7 Address 0F

Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.


Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0
0 Lens shutter (IR-051 board S601) Close Open
Using method:
1) Select page: 7, address: 0F.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

7. Switch check (3)


Page 7 Address 4F

Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.


Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0
0 REC PROOF SW (Mechanism chassis) SAVE REC
Using method:
1) Select page: 7, address: 4F.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

6-57
DCR-HC40/HC40E

8. Switch check (4)


Page 7 Address F3

Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.


Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0
0 AUDIO VIDEO jack (JK-260 board CN701) Used Not used
Using method:
1) Select page: 7, address: F3.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

9. Switch check (5)


Page 7 Address F4

Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.


Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0
2 MIC jack (IR-051 board J601) Used Not used
Using method:
1) Select page: 7, address: F4.
2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

10. Switch check (6)


Page 7 Address 60 to 63, 66 to 68

Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Using method:
1) Select page: 7, address: 60 to 63, 66 to 68.
2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be discriminated.
Example: If the data of address: 60 is “01” and the data of address: 61 is “67”, the data of KEY AD0 signal is “0167”. It can be
discriminated that the PHOTO REC button is pressed.

Data (4 digits)
Address 0000 006C 00D4 014C 0280 03FC
(0000 to 0033) (0034 to 009B) (009C to 010F) (0110 to 019B) (022C to 02DB) (039C to 03FF)
60 (Upper digits) PHOTO PHOTO
REC START/STOP
61 (Lower digits) (PHOTO REC) (PHOTO FREEZE)
(SS6300 block) No key input
(KEY AD0) (SS6300 block) (SS6300 block)
(S001)
(IC8401 <zc.>) (S002) (S003)
62 (Upper digits) LCD BACK LIGHT
REC START/STOP
63 (Lower digits) ON/OFF
(SB6300 block) No key input
(KEY AD1) (SB6300 block)
(S001)
(IC8401 <zv/>>) (S002)
66 (Upper digits)
EASY BACK LIGHT PANEL CLOSE PANEL OPEN
67 (Lower digits)
(CF6300 block) (CF6300 block) (CF6300 block) (CF6300 block)
(KEY AD3)
(S004) (S002) (S001) (S001)
(IC8401 <zvx>>)
68 (Upper digits)
PANEL REVERSE PANEL NORMAL
69 (Lower digits)
(FP-836 flexible) (FP-836 flexible)
(KEY AD4)
(S101) (S101)
(IC8401 <zvc>)

6-58
DCR-HC40/HC40E

11. LED check


Page 7 Address 00, 01, 04

Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Using method:
1) Select page: 7, address: 01, and set data: 90.
2) Select page: 7, address: 04, and set data: 01.
3) Select page: 7, address: 00, set data: 01 and press the PAUSE button.
4) Check that the following LEDs are lit.
TALLY, CHARGE, CAMERA-TAPE, CAMERA-MEMORY, PLAY/EDIT, MEMORY STICK, NIGHT SHOT light,
EASY OPERATION
5) Check that the following LED is blinking.
ILLUMINATION
6) Select page: 7, address: 01, and set data: 90.
7) Select page: 7, address: 04, and set data: 00.
8) Select page: 7, address: 00, set data: 01 and press the PAUSE button.
9) Select page: 7, address: 00, and set data: 00.
10) Select page: 7, address: 01, and set data: 00.

12. Record of Use check (1)


Page 7 Address A7 to A9

Note1: When replacing the drum assembly or the mechanism deck, initialize the data of address: A7 to A9.
Note2: This data will be kept even if the lithium battery (MS-200 board BT501) is removed.
Note3: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.
Address Function Remarks
A7 Drum rotation Hour (H) 100000th place digit and 10000th place digit of counted time
A8 counted time Hour (M) 1000th place digit and 100th place digit of counted time
A9 (BCD code) Hour (L) 10th place digit and 1st place digit of counted time
Using method:
1) The record of use data is displayed at addresses: A7 to A9.

Initializing method:
1) Select page: 7, address: A7, set data: 00 and press the PAUSE button.
2) Select page: 7, address: A8, set data: 00 and press the PAUSE button.
3) Select page: 7, address: A9, set data: 00 and press the PAUSE button.

13. Record of Use check (2)


Page 7 Address C8 to CD

Note1: This data will be kept even if the lithium battery (MS-200 board BT501) is removed.
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Address Function Remarks


C8 User initial power Year
C9 on date Month After setting the clock, set the date of power on next
CA (BCD code) Day
CB Final condensation Year
CC occurrence data Month
CD (BCD code) Day

Using method:
1) The record of use data is displayed at addresses: C8 to CD.

6-59
DCR-HC40/HC40E

14. Record of Self-diagnosis check

Page 7 Address B0 to C6

Note1: This data will be kept even if the lithium battery (MS-200 board
BT501) is removed.
Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be “00”.

Address Self-diagnosis code


B0 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1
B1 “Block function” code (Occurred 1st time)
B2 “Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time)
B4 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1
B5 “Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B6 “Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B8 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1
B9 “Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time)
BA “Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)
BC “Repaired by” code (Occurred 4th time) *1
BD “Block function” code (Occurred 4th time)
BE “Detailed” code (Occurred 4th time)
C0 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 5th time) *1
C1 “Block function” code (Occurred 5th time)
C2 “Detailed” code (Occurred 5th time)
C4 “Repaired by” code (Occurred the last time) *1
C5 “Block function” code (Occurred the last time)
C6 “Detailed” code (Occurred the last time)
*1: “01” t “C”, “03” t “E”

Using method:
1) The past self-diagnosis codes are displayed at addresses: BC to C6. Refer to the following table.

Initializing method:
1) Select page: 7, address: 01, and set data: C0.
2) Select page: 7, address: 00, set data: 01 and press the PAUSE button.
3) Check that the data of page: 7, address: B0 to C7 are “00”.
4) Select page: 7, address: 00, and set data: 00.
5) Select page: 7, address: 01, and set data: 00.

6-60
DCR-HC40/HC40E
〈FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉

For NTSC model

DCR-HC40
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR
REPRODUCTION FRAME with
a clear sheet for use.


For PAL model

DCR-HC40E

6-61E
DCR-HC40/HC40E

Sony EMCS Co. 2004A1600-1


9-876-703-51 ©2004.1
— 66 — Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
ENGLISH JAPANESE

[Description of main button functions on toolbar of the Adobe Acrobat Reader Ver5.0 (for Windows)]

Toolbar

Printing a text Reversing the screens displayed once


1. Click the Print button . • To reverse the previous screens (operation) one by one, click
2. Specify a printer, print range, number of copies, and other op- the .
tions, and then click [OK]. • To advance the reversed screens (operation) one by one, click
the .
Application of printing:
To set a range to be printed within a page, select the graphic
Application to the Service Manual:
selection tool and drag on the page to enclose a range to
This function allows you to go and back between circuit dia-
be printed, and then click the Print button. gram and printed circuit board diagram, and accordingly it
will be convenient for the voltage check.

Finding a text
1. Click the Find button . Moving with link
2. Enter a character string to be found into a text box, and click
the [Find]. (Specify the find options as necessary) 1. Select either palm tool , zoom tool , text selection tool
, or graphic selection tool .
Application to the Service Manual: 2. Place the pointer in the position in a text where the link exists
To execute “find” from current page toward the previous pages, (such as a button on cover and the table of contents page, or
select the check box “Find Backward” and then click the blue characters on the removal flowchart page or drawing
“Find”. page), and the pointer will change to the forefinger form .
3. Then, click the link. (You will go to the link destination.)

Moving with bookmark:


Click an item (text) on the bookmark pallet, and you can move
to the link destination. Also, clicking can display the
hidden items.
(To go back to original state, click )
3. Open the find dialog box again, and click the [Find Again] and
you can find the matched character strings displayed next.
(Character strings entered previously are displayed as they are
in the text box.)

Application to the Service Manual:


The parts on the drawing pages (block diagrams, circuit dia-
grams, printed circuit boards) and parts list pages in a text
can be found using this find function. For example, find a
Ref. No. of IC on the block diagram, and click the [Find Again]
continuously, so that you can move to the Ref. No. of IC on Zooming or rotating the screen display
the circuit diagram or printed circuit board diagram succes- “Zoom in/out”
sively. • Click the triangle button in the zoom control box to select the
Note: The find function may not be applied to the Service display magnification. Or, you may click or for zoom-
Manual depending on the date of issue.
ing in or out.

Switching a page
• To move to the first page, click the .
• To move to the last page, click the . “Rotate”
• To move to the previous page, click the . • Click rotate tool , and the page then rotates 90 degrees each.

• To move to the next page, click the .


Application to the Service Manual:
The printed circuit board diagram you see now can be changed
to the same direction as the set.
ENGLISH JAPANESE
Reverse 987670351.pdf

Revision History

S.M. Rev.
Ver. Date History Contents
issued
1.0 2004.01 Official Release — —

Você também pode gostar